caution - Support

Proprietary Notice and Liability Disclaimer 

The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is the 

valuable property of NEC Computer Systems Division, Packard Bell NEC, Inc. (hereinafter “NEC 

CSD”) and/or its licensors. NEC CSD and/or its licensors, as appropriate, reserve all patent, 

copyright and other proprietary rights to this document, including all design, manufacturing, 

reproduction, use, and sales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to 

others. 

The NEC CSD product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of 

the Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However, actual performance of each such 

product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration, customer data, and operator 

control. Since implementation by customers of each product may vary, the suitability of specific 

product configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted 

by NEC CSD. 

To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subject to 

change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior 

written approval of NEC CSD is prohibited. 

As an ENERGY star partner, NEC Computer Systems Division (NEC CSD) has determined that this product meets the 

ENERGY star guidelines for energy efficiency. 

FaxFlash is a service mark of NEC CSD, Packard Bell NEC, Inc. 

NEC and PowerMate are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation, used under license. 

ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered trademark. 

All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their 

respective trademark owners. 

First Printing — June 1998 

Copyright 1998 

NEC Computer Systems Division 

Packard Bell NEC, Inc. 

1414 Massachusetts Avenue 

Boxborough, MA 01719-2298 

All Rights Reserved

Contents 

Preface .............................................................................................................................ix 

Abbreviations...................................................................................................................xi 

1 System Overview 

Configurations............................................................................................................... 1-2 

Features......................................................................................................................... 1-4 

Front Features .......................................................................................................... 1-4 

Back Features........................................................................................................... 1-6 

Inside Features ......................................................................................................... 1-8 

Security Features...................................................................................................... 1-9 

Components .................................................................................................................1-10 

System Board..........................................................................................................1-10 

Riser Board .............................................................................................................1-11 

Diskette Drive .........................................................................................................1-11 

Hard Drive ..............................................................................................................1-11 

Power Supply ..........................................................................................................1-12 

Keyboard.................................................................................................................1-12 

Mouse .....................................................................................................................1-12 

AGP Board..............................................................................................................1-13 

CD-ROM Drive.......................................................................................................1-13 

Speakers..................................................................................................................1-13 

Fax/Modem Board...................................................................................................1-13 

Sound Board............................................................................................................1-14 

Local Area Network ................................................................................................1-14 

SCSI Adapter Board................................................................................................1-14 

PC Adapter Device..................................................................................................1-15 

Tape Backup Unit....................................................................................................1-15 

Zip Drive.................................................................................................................1-15 

2 System Configuration 

Interrupt Requests ......................................................................................................... 2-2 

System Interrupts ..................................................................................................... 2-2 

Parallel Port Interrupts.............................................................................................. 2-3 

Serial Port Interrupts ................................................................................................ 2-4 

Jumper Settings ............................................................................................................. 2-4 

System Board Jumper Settings.................................................................................. 2-5 

Riser Board LAN Jumper Settings............................................................................ 2-5 

Riser Board Fan Jumper Settings .............................................................................. 2-5 

Maxtor IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings .................................................................. 2-6 

Quantum IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings ............................................................... 2-6 

IBM IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings ...................................................................... 2-7 

Seagate and Quantum SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings .......................................... 2-7 

Western Digital SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings.................................................... 2-8 

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings .............................................................. 2-8 

Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings.............................................. 2-9 

56-Kbps Fax/Modem Board Jumper Settings ............................................................ 2-9 

Zip Drive Jumper Settings ........................................................................................ 2-9 

Tape Backup Unit Jumper Settings ..........................................................................2-10 

Contents iii

BIOS Setup ..................................................................................................................2-10 

When to Use BIOS Setup ........................................................................................2-10 

How to Start BIOS Setup.........................................................................................2-11 

How to Use Setup....................................................................................................2-12 

Main Menu..............................................................................................................2-12 

Displayed Information .................................................................................... 2-12 

Language........................................................................................................ 2-13 

ECC Configuration ......................................................................................... 2-13 

L2 Cache ECC Support................................................................................... 2-13 

System Time/Date........................................................................................... 2-13 

Advanced Menu ......................................................................................................2-13 

Plug & Play O/S ............................................................................................. 2-13 

Reset Configuration Data................................................................................ 2-13 

Numlock......................................................................................................... 2-13 

Peripheral Configuration................................................................................. 2-14 

IDE Configuration .......................................................................................... 2-16 

Floppy Options ............................................................................................... 2-17 

DMI Event Logging........................................................................................ 2-18 

Video Configuration ....................................................................................... 2-19 

Resource Configuration................................................................................... 2-19 

Keyboard Configuration.................................................................................. 2-20 

Security Menu.........................................................................................................2-20 

Power Menu............................................................................................................2-21 

Boot Menu ..............................................................................................................2-22 

Exit Menu ...............................................................................................................2-24 

Maintenance Menu..................................................................................................2-24 

Video Modes................................................................................................................2-25 

Utilities ........................................................................................................................2-26 

SCSISelect Utility ...................................................................................................2-26 

BIOS Update Utility................................................................................................2-26 

LANDESK Client Manager.....................................................................................2-27 

PC Health Indicator......................................................................................... 2-28 

Inventory ........................................................................................................ 2-29 

DMI................................................................................................................ 2-29 

Monitoring Capabilities................................................................................... 2-30 

Using the Chassis Intrusion Notification Feature............................................. 2-30 

NEC Auto Backup...................................................................................................2-31 

NEC Select Install CD.............................................................................................2-31 

Choosing a Restore Program........................................................................... 2-32 

Rebuilding the Hard Drive and Restoring the Operating System...................... 2-33 

Auto Rebuild and Restore ............................................................................... 2-33 

Custom Rebuild and Restore........................................................................... 2-36 

Restoring the Operating System ...................................................................... 2-40 

Installing Applications .................................................................................... 2-42 

Using the NEC Select Install CD with a SCSI Drive........................................ 2-44 

Using the Selective Application Restore Program on a Remote CD ................. 2-44 

NEC Help Center Online Documentation.................................................................2-46 

Installing the NEC Help Center Online Documentation................................... 2-46 

Uninstalling the NEC Help Center .................................................................. 2-46 

NEC Driver CD.......................................................................................................2-47 

Installing Drivers With the NEC Driver CD .................................................... 2-47 

Installing Drivers From a Remote CD ............................................................. 2-47 

Cheyenne Backup....................................................................................................2-49 

iv Contents

NEC Security ..........................................................................................................2-49 

NEC SNMP Agent ..................................................................................................2-50 

Installing the NEC SNMP Agent..................................................................... 2-50 

Configuring the NEC SNMP Agent for Windows 95....................................... 2-51 

Configuring the NEC SNMP Agent for Windows NT ..................................... 2-52 

NEC WebTelligent..................................................................................................2-53 

NEC WebTelligent Features............................................................................ 2-53 

NEC WebTelligent Requirements ................................................................... 2-54 

NEC WebTelligent Installation ....................................................................... 2-55 

NEC Configuration Change Notification..................................................................2-58 

3 Disassembly and Reassembly 

System Unit Cover Removal.......................................................................................... 3-3 

Removing the System Unit Cover............................................................................. 3-4 

Replacing the System Unit Cover ............................................................................. 3-6 

Chassis Floor Removal.................................................................................................. 3-7 

Removing the Chassis Floor ..................................................................................... 3-7 

Replacing the Chassis Floor...................................................................................... 3-8 

Removing the Stand ................................................................................................. 3-9 

Replacing the Stand.................................................................................................3-10 

Expansion Board Removal ...........................................................................................3-11 

Front Panel Removal ....................................................................................................3-12 

Blank Panel and Metal Slot Cover Removal..................................................................3-13 

Expansion Board Guide Removal .................................................................................3-14 

Switch Board/IR Panel Assembly Removal ..................................................................3-14 

DIMM Module Removal ..............................................................................................3-15 

AGP Board Removal....................................................................................................3-16 

Processor Subsystem Removal......................................................................................3-17 

5 1/4-Inch Device Removal ..........................................................................................3-18 

3 1/2-Inch Hard Drive Removal....................................................................................3-19 

3 1/2-Inch Diskette Drive Removal...............................................................................3-20 

Power Supply Removal ................................................................................................3-21 

System Board Removal and Replacement.....................................................................3-22 

System Board Removal ...........................................................................................3-22 

System Board Replacement .....................................................................................3-23 

Plastic Rail Removal ...............................................................................................3-25 

Riser Board Removal....................................................................................................3-26 

CMOS Battery Removal...............................................................................................3-27 

4 System Board 

Connectors, Jumpers, and Sockets ................................................................................. 4-2 

External Cable Connectors ....................................................................................... 4-2 

Internal Connectors .................................................................................................. 4-3 

System Board Jumpers ............................................................................................. 4-4 

Changing Processor Speed .............................................................................. 4-4 

Clearing a Password........................................................................................ 4-6 

BIOS Recovery............................................................................................... 4-7 

Upgrade Sockets....................................................................................................... 4-8 

Processor Socket............................................................................................. 4-8 

DIMM Sockets ............................................................................................... 4-8 

Checking System Memory .............................................................................. 4-10 

Contents v

Components .................................................................................................................4-10 

Processor and Secondary Cache...............................................................................4-12 

System BIOS...........................................................................................................4-13 

System Memory ......................................................................................................4-13 

Hardware Monitor ...................................................................................................4-14 

Plug and Play ..........................................................................................................4-14 

NLX Design............................................................................................................4-14 

ISA Bus...................................................................................................................4-14 

PCI Local Bus.........................................................................................................4-15 

PCI/IDE Ports .........................................................................................................4-15 

Parallel Interface .....................................................................................................4-15 

Serial Interface ........................................................................................................4-16 

USB Interface..........................................................................................................4-17 

Infrared Interface.....................................................................................................4-17 

Graphics Capabilities...............................................................................................4-17 

Accelerated Graphics Port .......................................................................................4-18 

Graphics Controller .................................................................................................4-18 

Motion Video Controller .........................................................................................4-18 

Graphics Support.....................................................................................................4-18 

Integrated Audio......................................................................................................4-19 

Pin Assignments...........................................................................................................4-20 

Parallel Interface Connector.....................................................................................4-20 

Serial Interface Connectors......................................................................................4-21 

Keyboard and Mouse Connectors ............................................................................4-21 

Universal Serial Bus Connectors..............................................................................4-22 

VGA Interface Connector........................................................................................4-22 

Microphone In Connector........................................................................................4-23 

Line In Connector....................................................................................................4-23 

Line Out Connector .................................................................................................4-23 

DIMM Sockets........................................................................................................4-24 

Resources.....................................................................................................................4-25 

Memory Map ..........................................................................................................4-25 

I/O Addresses..........................................................................................................4-26 

DMA Settings .........................................................................................................4-28 

5 Riser Board 

Subsystem Cable Connectors......................................................................................... 5-3 

CD Audio In Connector............................................................................................ 5-3 

Modem In Connector................................................................................................ 5-3 

Wake-On LAN Connector ........................................................................................ 5-4 

Chassis Intrusion Detection Connector ..................................................................... 5-4 

Front Panel/IrDA Connector..................................................................................... 5-4 

Fan Connector.......................................................................................................... 5-5 

LAN Connector........................................................................................................ 5-5 

IDE and Diskette Drive Cable Connectors ..................................................................... 5-6 

IDE Connectors........................................................................................................ 5-6 

Diskette Drive Connector ......................................................................................... 5-7 

PCI and ISA Cable Connectors...................................................................................... 5-8 

PCI Connectors ........................................................................................................ 5-8 

ISA Bus Connector................................................................................................... 5-9 

NLX Connector P1 (PCI Segment) ..........................................................................5-10 

NLX Connector P1 (ISA Segment)..........................................................................5-14 

NLX Connector P1 (IDE, Diskette Drive, and Front Panel Segment) .......................5-17 

vi Contents

NLX Connector JP2 (Supplemental Connector Segment).........................................5-22 

Power Supply Cable Connectors...................................................................................5-23 

Jumper Settings ............................................................................................................5-24 

LAN Jumper Settings ..............................................................................................5-24 

Fan Jumper Settings ................................................................................................5-25 

Changing Jumpers...................................................................................................5-25 

6 Illustrated Parts Breakdown 

Parts and Options .......................................................................................................... 6-2 

Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) List................................................................................. 6-2 

Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB).................................................................................. 6-5 

7 Preventive Maintenance 

System Cleaning............................................................................................................ 7-2 

Keyboard Cleaning........................................................................................................ 7-2 

Mouse Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 7-3 

8 Troubleshooting 

Checklist .......................................................................................................................8-2 

System Problems...................................................................................................... 8-2 

Diskette Drive Problems........................................................................................... 8-3 

Monitor Problems..................................................................................................... 8-4 

Keyboard/Mouse Problems....................................................................................... 8-4 

CD-ROM Drive Problems ........................................................................................ 8-5 

Speaker Problems..................................................................................................... 8-5 

Diagnostics.................................................................................................................... 8-6 

9 NEC CSD Information Services 

Service Telephone Numbers .......................................................................................... 9-2 

Technical Support ......................................................................................................... 9-3 

NEC CSD Website................................................................................................... 9-3 

Email/Fax Technical Support Service ....................................................................... 9-3 

Technical Support Services....................................................................................... 9-4 

Product Information....................................................................................................... 9-4 

NEC CSD FTP Site.................................................................................................. 9-4 

NEC CSD Bulletin Board Service............................................................................. 9-5 

FaxFlash Service ........................................................................................................... 9-6 

10 Specifications 

System Board Specifications ........................................................................................10-3 

Riser Board Specifications............................................................................................10-4 

Keyboard Specifications...............................................................................................10-4 

Mouse Specifications....................................................................................................10-5 

Speaker Specifications..................................................................................................10-5 

System Unit Specifications...........................................................................................10-6 

Diskette Drive Specifications........................................................................................10-7 

3.2-GB Quantum Hard Drive Specifications .................................................................10-8 

3.2-GB Maxtor Hard Drive Specifications ....................................................................10-9 

4.3-GB Quantum Hard Drive Specifications ...............................................................10-10 

4.3-GB Maxtor Hard Drive Specifications ..................................................................10-11 


Contents vii




8.4-GB IBM Hard Drive Specifications ......................................................................10-16 

4.5-GB Quantum SCSI Hard Drive Specifications ......................................................10-17 

4.5-GB Seagate SCSI Hard Drive Specifications.........................................................10-18 

9.1-GB Western Digital SCSI Hard Drive Specifications ............................................10-19 

NLX200-Watt Power Supply Specifications ...............................................................10-20 

Fax/Modem Board Specifications...............................................................................10-20 

ATI Xpert@Work AGP Board Specifications.............................................................10-21 

AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II 2D/3D AGP Board Specifications...........................10-21 

Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications...................................................10-22 

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications...................................................................10-23 

Sound Board Specifications........................................................................................10-24 

PC Adapter Device Specifications ..............................................................................10-25 

Tape Backup Unit Specifications................................................................................10-25 

Zip Drive Specifications.............................................................................................10-26 

Environmental and Safety Specifications ....................................................................10-27 

Compliance ................................................................................................................10-28 

A Release Notes 

General Notes................................................................................................................A-2 

Installing Applications and Online Documentation ...................................................A-2 

Choosing the Correct Installation Method ....................................................... A-2 

Installing Applications in the Correct Order .................................................... A-2 

Uninstalling the NEC SNMP Agent or LANDesk Client Manager ............................A-3 

Correcting Video Corruption ....................................................................................A-4 

Correcting Video Corruption in a Windows 95 System.................................... A-4 

Correcting Video Corruption in a Windows NT System .................................. A-5 

Setting Boot Order in BIOS......................................................................................A-5 

Using 16-MB DIMMs ..............................................................................................A-5 

Configuring the System for the NEC SNMP Agent...................................................A-5 

Configuring the System for NEC WebTelligent ........................................................A-5 

Configuring the System for Microsoft Internet Explorer............................................A-6 

Changing Network Settings ......................................................................................A-6 

SCSI Drive Limitations .................................................................................................A-7 

Booting from a CD...................................................................................................A-7 

Using the NEC Select Install CD with a SCSI Drive .................................................A-7 

PIIX4 Limitations..........................................................................................................A-7 

Reconfiguring Ultra DMA Support...........................................................................A-7 

Determining IDE Device Compatibility....................................................................A-8 

Windows 95 Issues........................................................................................................A-8 

Controlling CD Audio ..............................................................................................A-8 

Using Cheyenne Backup...........................................................................................A-8 

Backing Up Large Drives................................................................................ A-8 

Using Cheyenne Backup with LANDesk Client Manager................................ A-8 

Clicking the Product Catalog Button.........................................................................A-9 

Glossary 

Index 

viii Contents

List of Figures 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Components ........................................................................ 1-2 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Front View.......................................................................... 1-4 

System Controls and Lamps.................................................................................................. 1-4 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Back View .......................................................................... 1-6 

Audio Connectors ................................................................................................................. 1-6 

Inside the System.................................................................................................................. 1-8 

BIOS Setup Main Menu.......................................................................................................2-11 

Welcome Screen ..................................................................................................................2-34 

NEC Selective Application Restore Screen...........................................................................2-43 

NEC WebTelligent...............................................................................................................2-53 

NEC WebTelligent Login Screen.........................................................................................2-57 

NEC WebTelligent Control Screen.......................................................................................2-58 

Loosening Cover Screws....................................................................................................... 3-4 

Removing the Cover ............................................................................................................. 3-5 

Aligning the Cover................................................................................................................ 3-6 

Locating the Chassis Floor Thumb Screw.............................................................................. 3-7 

Removing the Chassis Floor.................................................................................................. 3-8 

Removing the Stand..............................................................................................................3-9 

Aligning the System Unit With the Stand.............................................................................3-10 

Securing the System Unit in the Stand..................................................................................3-10 

Removing the Expansion Board ...........................................................................................3-11 

Removing the Front Panel....................................................................................................3-12 

Removing the Blank Panel...................................................................................................3-13 

Removing a DIMM Module.................................................................................................3-15 

Removing the AGP Board....................................................................................................3-16 

Releasing the Processor Subsystem......................................................................................3-17 

Locating the Locking Tabs...................................................................................................3-18 

Removing a 5 1/4-Inch Device.............................................................................................3-18 

Removing the Inner Hard Drive Screws ...............................................................................3-19 

Removing the Outer Hard Drive Screws...............................................................................3-20 

Removing the Power Supply Screws ....................................................................................3-21 

Unlatching the System Board...............................................................................................3-22 

Removing the System Board................................................................................................3-22 

Correct Alignment of the System Board...............................................................................3-23 

Incorrect Alignment of the System Board.............................................................................3-24 

Secured Position of Latch.....................................................................................................3-25 

Removing the System Board Plastic Rail..............................................................................3-25 

Locating the Riser Board Screws..........................................................................................3-26 

Locating the Battery.............................................................................................................3-27 

Removing the Battery ..........................................................................................................3-28 

System Board External Cable Connector Locations............................................................... 4-2 

System Board Internal Connector Locations.......................................................................... 4-3 

Locating Configuration Jumper Block J5G1.......................................................................... 4-4 

Subsystem Cable Connector Locations.................................................................................. 5-3 

IDE and Diskette Drive Cable Connectors............................................................................. 5-6 

PCI and ISA Cable Connector Locations............................................................................... 5-8 

Riser Board Power Supply Cable Connector Locations.........................................................5-23 

Riser Board Jumper Locations..............................................................................................5-24 

Contents ix

PowerMate 8100 Series Computer Illustrated Parts Breakdown............................................. 6-5 

Removing the Keyboard Enclosure ....................................................................................... 7-3 

Removing the Mouse Ball Cover........................................................................................... 7-3 

List of Tables 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Configuration...................................................................... 1-3 

System Components.............................................................................................................1-10 

Interrupt Level Assignments ................................................................................................. 2-3 

Parallel Port Interrupts .......................................................................................................... 2-3 

Serial Port 1 and Serial Port 2 Interrupts................................................................................ 2-4 

System Board Jumper J5G1 Settings ..................................................................................... 2-5 

Riser Board LAN Jumper JP7 Settings.................................................................................. 2-5 

Fan Jumper Block JP3 Settings ............................................................................................. 2-5 

Maxtor IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings............................................................................... 2-6 

Quantum IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings............................................................................ 2-6 

IBM IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings................................................................................... 2-7 

Seagate and Quantum SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings....................................................... 2-7 

Western Digital SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings ................................................................ 2-8 

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings........................................................................... 2-8 

Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings .......................................................... 2-9 

56-Kbps Fax/Modem Board Jumper Settings (Windows NT Only)........................................ 2-9 

Zip Drive Jumper Settings..................................................................................................... 2-9 

Tape Backup Unit Jumper Settings.......................................................................................2-10 

Navigation Keys ..................................................................................................................2-12 

Peripheral Configuration Parameters....................................................................................2-14 

IDE Device Configuration Parameters..................................................................................2-16 

Floppy Drive Options...........................................................................................................2-17 

DMI Event Logging.............................................................................................................2-18 

Video Configuration ............................................................................................................2-19 

Resource Configuration........................................................................................................2-19 

Keyboard Configuration.......................................................................................................2-20 

Security Menu Options ........................................................................................................2-20 

Power Menu Options ...........................................................................................................2-21 

Boot Menu Options..............................................................................................................2-22 

Exit Menu Options...............................................................................................................2-24 

Maintenance Menu Options .................................................................................................2-24 

System Utilities....................................................................................................................2-26 

PowerMate 8100 Series Disassembly Sequence..................................................................... 3-2 

System Board Internal Connectors ........................................................................................ 4-3 

Supported DIMMs ................................................................................................................ 4-9 

Sample DIMM Upgrade Paths .............................................................................................. 4-9 

System Board Components ..................................................................................................4-11 

Parallel Port Addresses ........................................................................................................4-16 

Serial Port 1 and Serial Port 2 I/O Addresses........................................................................4-16 

ATI XPERT@Work 2D Display Modes and Refresh Rates..................................................4-19 

ATI XPERT@Work 3D Display Modes...............................................................................4-19 

Parallel Interface Pin Assignments .......................................................................................4-20 

Serial Interface Pin Assignments..........................................................................................4-21 

x Contents

Keyboard and Mouse Pin Assignments ................................................................................4-21 

Universal Serial Bus Connector Pin Assignments.................................................................4-22 

VGA Interface Connector Pin Assignments..........................................................................4-22 

Microphone In Connector Pin Assignments..........................................................................4-23 

Line In Connector Pin Assignments .....................................................................................4-23 

Line Out Connector Pin Assignments..................................................................................4-23 

DIMM Socket Pin Assignments ...........................................................................................4-24 

System Memory Map...........................................................................................................4-26 

I/O Address Map .................................................................................................................4-26 

DMA Settings......................................................................................................................4-28 

CD Audio In Connector JP6 Pin Assignments ....................................................................... 5-3 

Modem In Connector JP1 Pin Assignments........................................................................... 5-3 

Wake-On LAN Connector J5 Pin Assignments...................................................................... 5-4 

Chassis Intrusion Detection Connector J6 Pin Assignments................................................... 5-4 

Front Panel/IrDA Connector J4 Pin Assignments .................................................................. 5-4 

Fan Connector J9 Pin Assignments ....................................................................................... 5-5 

LAN Connector RJ-45 Pin Assignments................................................................................ 5-5 

IDE Interface Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 5-6 

Diskette Drive Pin Assignments............................................................................................ 5-7 

PCI Bus Pin Assignments...................................................................................................... 5-8 

ISA Bus Connector Pin Assignments .................................................................................... 5-9 

NLX Connector P1 Pin Assignments (PCI Segment)............................................................5-10 

NLX Connector P1 Pin Assignments (ISA Segment)............................................................5-14 

NLX Connector P1 Pin Assignments (IDE, Diskette Drive, and Front Panel Segment) .........5-17 

NLX Connector JP2 Pin Assignments (Supplemental Connector Segment)...........................5-22 

Power Supply Main Power Connector Pin Assignments .......................................................5-23 

Power Supply Optional Power Connector Pin Assignments..................................................5-24 

LAN Jumper Block JP7 Settings ..........................................................................................5-24 

Fan Jumper Block JP3 Settings ............................................................................................5-25 

Ordering Parts and Options ................................................................................................... 6-2 

PowerMate 8100 Series System FRU List ............................................................................. 6-2 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Documentation and Packaging............................................. 6-5 

Problems and Solutions......................................................................................................... 8-6 

NEC CSD Service and Support Telephone Numbers ............................................................. 9-2 

System Specifications ..........................................................................................................10-2 

System Board Specifications................................................................................................10-3 

Riser Board Specifications ...................................................................................................10-4 

Keyboard Specifications ......................................................................................................10-4 

Mouse Specifications ...........................................................................................................10-5 

Speaker Specification...........................................................................................................10-5 

System Unit Specifications...................................................................................................10-6 

Diskette Drive Specifications ...............................................................................................10-7 

3.2-GB Quantum Fireball ST Hard Drive Specifications.......................................................10-8 

3.2-GB Maxtor DiamondMax Hard Drive Specifications......................................................10-9 

4.3-GB Quantum Fireball SE Hard Drive Specifications.....................................................10-10 

4.3-GB Maxtor DiamondMax Hard Drive Specifications....................................................10-11 

6.4-GB Quantum Fireball ST Hard Drive Specifications.....................................................10-12 



Contents xi


8.4-GB IBM DHEA Hard Drive Specifications ..................................................................10-16 

4.5-GB Quantum Viking Ultra Wide SCSI-3 Hard Drive Specifications.............................10-17 

4.5-GB Seagate Barracuda Ultra Wide SCSI Hard Drive Specifications .............................10-18 

9.1-GB Western Digital Ultra Wide SCSI Hard Drive Specifications..................................10-19 

NLX200 Watt Power Supply Specifications .......................................................................10-20 

Fax/Modem Board Specifications.......................................................................................10-20 

ATI Xpert@Work (RagePRO) AGP Board Specifications..................................................10-21 

AccelSTAR II 2D/3D AGP Board Specifications ...............................................................10-21 

Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications ..........................................................10-22 

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications ..........................................................................10-23 

Sound Board Specifications ...............................................................................................10-24 

PC Adapter Device Specifications......................................................................................10-25 

Tape Backup Unit Specifications........................................................................................10-25 

Zip Drive Specification......................................................................................................10-26 

Specifications ....................................................................................................................10-27 

System Compliance ...........................................................................................................10-28 

xii Contents

Preface 

This manual contains technical information for servicing and repairing the NEC 

PowerMate ® 8100 Series computers manufactured by NEC Computer Systems 

Division, Packard Bell NEC, Inc. The manual contains hardware and interface 

information for users who need an overview of system design. The manual 

includes system setup information, disassembly procedures, and illustrated parts 

lists. The manual is prepared for NEC CSD trained customer engineers, system 

analysts, service center personnel, and dealers. 

The manual is organized as follows. 

Section 1 — System Overview, provides an overview of system features and 

includes brief descriptions of system components. 

Section 2 — System Configuration, includes information on system IRQs, 

jumpers, and BIOS. The section also contains information on video modes and 

power management features. Also included is information on system utilities, 

including the SCSISelect utility, BIOS update utility, LANDesk ® Client 

Manager, and NEC Select Install CD. 

Section 3 — Disasssembly and Reassembly, provides computer disassembly 

and reassembly procedures. Each procedure is supported by detailed 

disassembly illustrations. 

Section 4 — System Board, includes information on cable and board 

connectors, jumper settings, and upgrade sockets. Also provided is information 

on board components, pin assignments, and memory map. 

Section 5 — Riser Board, provides cable connector information and pin 

assignments for the riser board installed in the system. 

Section 6 — Illustrated Parts Breakdown, includes an exploded view diagram 

(illustrated parts breakdown) and parts lists for field-replaceable parts. 

Section 7 — Preventive Maintenance, provides recommended maintenance 

information for maintaining the system in top condition. 

Section 8 — Troubleshooting, includes information for solving possible 

computer problems and their solutions. 

Section 9 — NEC CSD Information Services, lists telephone numbers for 

obtaining service. The section also includes information on NEC CSD technical 

support, website, bulletin board service, and FaxFlash SM service. 

Section 10 — Specifications, provides specifications on the major components 

in the system, including the system board, power supply, diskette drive, and 

hard drives. 

Appendix A — NEC PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes, describes 

recommended operating procedures not documented in other PowerMate 8100 

Series documentation. 

Preface xiii

Abbreviations 

A ampere 

AC alternating current 

ACK acknowledge 

AGP accelerated graphics port 

ASIC application-specific 

integrated circuit 

AT advanced technology 

(IBM PC) 

ATA AT attachment 

ATAPI AT attachment packet 

interface 

ATM asynchronous transfer mode 

BBS Bulletin Board Service 

BCD binary-coded decimal 

BCU BIOS Customized Utility 

BIOS basic input/output system 

bit binary digit 

BUU BIOS Upgrade Utility 

bpi bits per inch 

bps bits per second 

C capacitance 

C centigrade 

Cache high-speed buffer storage 

CAM constantly addressable 

memory 

CAS column address strobe 

CD-ROM compact disk-ROM 

CH channel 

clk clock 

cm centimeter 

CMOS complementary metal oxide 

semiconductor 

COM communication 

CONT contrast 

CPGA ceramic pin grid array 

CPU central processing unit 

DAC digital-to-analog converter 

DACK DMA acknowledge 

dB decibels 

DC direct current 

DCC direct cable connection 

DCE data communications 

equipment 

DDC Display Data Channel 

DIMM Dual In-Line Memory Module 

DIP dual in-line package 

DMA direct memory access 

DMAC DMA controller 

DMI Desktop Management 

Interface 

DOS disk operating system 

DRAM dynamic RAM 

DVD digital versatile disc 

ECC error checking and correction 

ECP extended capabilities port 

EDO extended data output 

EGA Enhanced Graphics Adapter 

EISA enhanced ISA 

email electronic mail 

EMI electromagnetic interference 

EPP enhanced parallel port 

EPROM erasable and programmable 

ROM 

ESD electrostatic discharge 

EVGA Enhanced Video Graphics 

Array 

F Fahrenheit 

FAX facsimile transmission 

FCC Federal Communications 

Commission 

FG frame ground 

FM frequency modulation 

FP fast page 

FRU field-replaceable unit 

ftp file transfer protocol 

GB gigabyte 

Abbreviations xv

GND ground 

HEX hexadecimal 

HGA Hercules Graphics Adapter 

Hz hertz 

IC integrated circuit 

ID identification 

IDE intelligent device electronics 

IDTR interrupt descriptor table 

register 

in. inch 

INTA interrupt acknowledge 

I/O input/output 

IPB illustrated parts breakdown 

IPC integrated peripheral 

controller 

ips inches per second 

IR infrared 

IrDA Infrared Data Association 

IRR Interrupt Request register 

ISA Industry Standard 

Architecture 

ISP internet service provider 

IRQ interrupt request 

K kilo (1024) 

k kilo (1000) 

KB kilobyte 

kg kilogram 

kHz kilohertz 

lb pound 

LAN local area network 

LED light-emitting diode 

LDCM LANDesk Client Manager 

LSB least-significant bit 

LSI large-scale integration 

M mega (million) 

mA milliamps 

max maximum 

MB megabyte 

MFM modified frequency 

modulation 

MHz megahertz 

xvi Abbreviations 

MIDI musical instrument digital 

interface 

mm millimeter 

MMX multimedia extensions 

modem modulator/demodulator 

MOS metal-oxide semiconductor 

MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group 

ms millisecond 

MSB most-significant bit 

NC not connected 

NIC networked information center 

NMI Non-maskable Interrupt 

ns nanosecond 

NSRC National Service Response 

Center 

OCR optical character recognition 

OS operating system 

PAL programmable array logic 

PC personal computer 

PCB printed circuit board 

PCI Peripheral Component 

Interconnect 

PDA personal digital assistant 

PFP plastic flat package 

PIO parallel input/output 

pixel picture element 

PLCC plastic leaded chip carrier 

PLL phase lock loop 

POST Power-On Self-Test 

p-p peak-to-peak 

PPI programmable peripheral 

interface 

PROM programmable ROM 

PS/2 personal system/2 

QFP quad flat pack 

R read 

RAM random-access memory 

RAMDAC RAM digital-to-analog 

converter 

RAS row address strobe 

RGB red green blue

RGBI red green blue intensity 

rms root mean square 

ROM read-only memory 

rpm revolutions per minute 

RTC real-time clock 

R/W read/write 

S slave 

SCSI Small Computer System 

Interface 

SDRAM synchronous dynamic random 

access memory 

S.E.C. single edge contact cartridge 

SG signal ground 

SGRAM synchronous graphics random 

access memory 

SIMM single inline memory module 

S/N signal to noise ratio 

SNMP simple network management 

protocol 

SPM standard page mode 

SRAM static random access memory 

SRS Sound Retrieval System 

SSI small scale integration 

SVGA Super Video Graphics Array 

SW switch 

T&D test and diagnostics 

TSC Technical Support Center 

TTL transistor/transistor logic 

tpi tracks per inch 

UART universal asynchronous 

receiver/transmitter 

UHF ultra high frequency 

UL Underwriter’s Laboratories 

UMA unified memory architecture 

UPS uninterruptible power supply 

URL uniform resource locator 

USB universal serial bus 

V volt 

Vac volts, alternating current 

VCR video cassette recorder 

Vdc volts, direct current 

VDT video display terminal 

VESA video electronics standards 

association 

VFC VESA-compliant feature 

connector 

VGA Video Graphics Array 

VHF very high frequency 

VLSI very large scale integration 

VRAM video RAM 

W watt 

WAN wide area network 

WRAM Windows RAM 

W write 

www world wide web 

Abbreviations xvii

System Overview 

� Configurations 

� Features 

� Components 

1

This section provides an overview of the NEC PowerMate ® 8100 Series 

minitower computer system configurations. The section highlights system 

hardware features, computer front, back, and inside features, and system 

security features. Also included are brief descriptions of the major components 

comprising the system. 

Configurations 

NEC PowerMate 8100 Series computer systems are built-to-order systems for 

commercial offices. The systems feature an Intel ® Pentium ® II processor, three 

dual inline memory module (DIMM) sockets, synchronous dynamic random 

access memory (SDRAM), and a plug and play input/output (I/O) controller. 

The system also features two universal serial bus (USB) ports, two serial ports, a 

parallel port, and an infrared port. Ultra direct memory access (DMA), remote 

wakeup (“Wake-On LAN”), accelerated graphics port (AGP), and power 

management are supported. 

Build choices include intelligent device electronics (IDE) hard drives ranging 

from 3.2 gigabyte (GB) to 8.4 GB, and an ultra wide SCSI 4.55-GB or 9.1-GB 

hard drive. System memory is provided in 32-megabyte (MB) (minimum) and 

(as available) 64-MB and 128-MB DIMM modules. Memory configurations 

range from 32 MB to 384 MB. 

Additional build choices include fax/modem, sound, video, and peripheral 

devices such as CD-ROM drives. 

The NLX system design leaves the system board free of internal cabling and 

allows easy system board removal and replacement with a simple chassis latch. 

The following figure shows the components shipped with the PowerMate 8100 

Series system (the monitor and speakers are optional). 

1-2 System Overview 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Components

The following table lists the PowerMate 8100 series system configuration. 

Component Description 

PowerMate 8100 Series System Configuration 

System Board Intel NX440BX with sound 

CPU* Pentium II 266 MHz MMX (66 MHz external) 

Pentium II 300 MHz MMX (66 MHz external) 




System RAM* 32 MB (minimum) to 384 MB of SDRAM in 3 DIMM sockets 

Hard Drive* IDE Ultra DMA/33: 

3.2 GB (Maxtor 83240D3, Quantum ST32A011, SE32A012) 

4.3 GB (Maxtor 84320D4, Quantum SE43A012) 

6.4 GB (Maxtor 86480D6, Quantum ST64A011, SE640A012) 

8.4 GB (Maxtor 88400D8, Quantum SE84A012, IBM DHEA-38451) 

Ultra Wide SCSI 

4.55 GB (Seagate ST34572W, Quantum VK45W012) 

9.1 GB (Western Digital WDE91000-0007A3) 

Cache 512-KB Pipeline Burst SRAM integrated on processor cartridge 

AGP Slot AGP slot on system board supports AGP-compatible graphics boards 

Graphics Memory System board: 4 MB synchronous graphics random-access memory (SGRAM) 

Graphics board: 4 MB or 8 MB SGRAM (depending on board installed) 

Audio Crystal CS4235B audio chip integrated on system board 

Diskette Drive NEC 3.5-inch 1.44-MB (FD1231H-013) 

Power Supply NLX 200-watt 

Keyboard Chicony 6923 

Mouse Microsoft ® IntelliMouse 

CD-ROM Drive** NEC 32X 

Lucky Goldstar 32X 

Fax/Modem Board** U.S. Robotics ® 56.6 Kbps Akita II (80-661787-02) 

AGP Board** ATI ® XPERT@Work (RagePRO) 4-MB AGP board 

ATI XPERT@Work (RagePRO) 4-MB AGP board with 4-MB upgrade 

AccelGRAPHICS ® AccelSTAR II (3D Labs Permedia 2A) graphics board 

SCSI Adapter 

Board** 

Adaptec ® 2940 Ultra Wide SCSI Adapter Board 

Sound Board** Creative Labs CT4335 (AWE-32) 

Zip Drive** Iomega ® 100-MB Zip Drive 

Tape Backup Drive** Seagate Travan 4/8-GB Tape Backup Device 

Speakers** Altec-Lansing 9-watt (ASC-90R) 

* Component varies by system 

** Built-to-order component 

System Overview 1-3

Features 

Front Features 

The system’s front, back, and inside features are described in the following 

paragraphs. Also included are descriptions of the system’s security features. 

The following figures identify the components, lamps, and controls on the front 

of the system. Brief descriptions of the components follow the figures. 


PowerMate 8100 Series System Front View 

System Controls and Lamps

System controls allow the selection of specific system operations. Lamps 

visually alert the user to the status of system operation. The system has the 

following devices, controls, and lamps on the front of the system (see the 

preceding figures for device, control, and lamp locations). 

� Diskette drive — copy data files to and from a diskette or as a bootable 

drive for loading and starting programs from a diskette. 

� CD-ROM drive — load and start programs from a compact disc (CD) and 

to play audio CDs. 

� Suspend button — suspends system operation for saving power. An 

amber power lamp lights when in suspend (power-saving) mode. Pressing 

any key or moving the mouse resumes system operation. 

� Disk lamp — when lit, indicates that the hard drive is active. A lit lamp 

indicates that the hard drive is reading or writing data. 

� Power lamp — indicates if system power is on or off or in suspend mode. 

A steady green lamp indicates power is on to all components. An amber 

lamp indicates that the system is in suspend mode with full power 

reduction. 

� Reset button — restarts the computer after it is powered on. Used to reset 

the computer if it is not operating properly. 

� Power button — turns system power on or off. 

� IR window — supports two-way wireless communications for 

transferring files to or from portable devices through the preinstalled 

LapLink ® applications software. 

The computer also has a stand to prevent it from tipping over. The computer 

must be kept in the stand except when opening or upgrading the computer. 

! WARNING 

Keep the computer in the stand except when servicing. The 

stand is designed to keep the computer from tipping over. 

System Overview 1-5

Back Features 

The back of the computer contains external connectors, a power socket, and 

expansion board slots. The following figures identify the connectors on the back 

of the system. Brief descriptions of each connector follow the figures. 


PowerMate 8100 Series System Back View 

Audio Connectors

External connectors allow the attachment of peripheral devices such as a 

monitor, keyboard, mouse, and printer. The system has the following external 

connectors. 

� LAN connector — The RJ-45 local area network (LAN) connector 

permits connection of the system to an Ethernet LAN for communication 

with other computers. 

� Audio connectors — The following audio connectors are on the back of 

the system: 

⎯ microphone in jack. This jack allows the connection of a microphone 

for recording audio information in data files. 

⎯ line in jack. This jack allows the connection of a stereo audio device 

such as a stereo amplifier, cassette, or minidisc player for playback 

or recording. 

⎯ line out jack. This jack allows the connection of an amplified output 

device such as powered speakers, stereo tape recorder, or an external 

amplifier for audio output. Use this jack for ordered speakers. 

� USB ports — The two USB ports permit the connection of up to 127 

USB configured peripheral devices such as printers, monitors, modems, 

mouse, and game pads/joysticks. 

� Serial ports — Serial port 1 (COM1) and serial port 2 (COM2) allow the 

connection of serial devices with 9-pin connectors. The devices include a 

pointing device, serial printer, or modem. 

� Keyboard port — Attach a keyboard (PS/2 ® -compatible, 101-key or 

102-key) with a 6-pin mini DIN connector to this port. 

� Mouse port — Attach a mouse (PS/2-compatible) to this port. 

� Printer port — Attach a parallel printer with a 25-pin connector to this 

port. 

� VGA monitor connector — Attach a video graphics array 

(VGA)-compatible monitor (NEC MultiSync ® monitor or other 

VGA-compatible monitor) with a 15-pin connector to this AGP board 

connector. 

� Expansion board slots — Use these slots to install up to five optional 

boards (graphics, fax/modem, SCSI). 

� SCSI port — Some systems come with a SCSI adapter board in an 

expansion slot. The port allows the connection of up to 15 ultra wide 

SCSI devices. 

� Fax/modem ports — Some systems come with a 56-Kbps fax/modem 

board in an expansion slot. The board allows the connection of a phone 

line to the system for fax and data communications. 

System Overview 1-7

Inside Features 

The following figure shows the interior of the computer and its major areas. A 

list of features follow the figure. 


Inside the System 

The inside of the system has the following features: 

� system board with connectors for the Pentium II processor single edge 

contact (S.E.C.) cartridge, DIMM memory, AGP board, and external 

devices 

� riser board with two IDE connectors, diskette drive connector, five 

expansion board connectors, an external LAN connector, and internal 

signal and power connectors 

� AGP board (a built-to-order component) 

� three accessible 5 1/4-inch slots for expansion 

� one accessible 3 1/2-inch diskette drive slot (contains 1.44-MB diskette 

drive) 

� two 3 1/2-inch internal device slots (contains one or two hard drives) 

� 200-watt power supply. 

For more information on the above features, see “Components” in this section.

Security Features 

The system has hardware, software, and mechanical security features that offer 

protection against unauthorized access to the system and data. The following 

security features are available: 

� Password Security 

The BIOS Setup utility includes a feature that allows a user to set either a 

user or supervisor password or both. 

The user password controls booting of the system and controls access to 

the Setup utility and the keyboard. User access to the BIOS Setup utility 

is limited when a supervisor password is set. The supervisor password 

allows full access to the system and the BIOS. 

The unattended start security feature, when enabled, allows the system to 

boot but locks the keyboard until the user password is entered. 

See Section 2, “System Configuration,” for further information on setting 

and using passwords and the unattended start feature. 

� NEC Security 

The NEC Security utility allows password protection and permits the user 

to disable access to the diskette drive, COM ports, or printers. 

Refer to Section 2, “System Configuration,” for information on using the 

NEC Security utility. 

� Windows Network Security Features 

The Windows Network Security feature is available through the 

Windows operating system. Check the Windows documentation for 

details. 

� Chassis Intrusion Notification 

Whenever the chassis cover is removed, LANDesk Client Manager logs 

the incident and reports it on screen the next time the system is booted. 

See Section 2, “System Configuration,” for information on the chassis 

intrusion notification feature. 

� Security Locking Tab 

The security locking tab on the back of the chassis accepts a Kensington ® 

Security Standard connector or other locking device. The locking device 

secures the computer to an immovable object to prevent theft. 

System Overview 1-9

Components 

System Board 

The major system components are listed in the following table, along with the 

page number where each component is briefly described. 


System Components 

Component Go to Page 

System Board 1-10 

Riser Board 1-11 

Diskette Drive 1-11 

Hard Drive* 1-11 

Power Supply 1-12 

Keyboard 1-12 

Mouse 1-12 

AGP Board** 1-13 

CD-ROM Drive** 1-13 

Speakers** 1-13 

Fax/Modem Board** 1-13 

Sound Board** 1-14 

SCSI Adapter Board** 1-14 

PC Adapter Device** 1-15 

Tape Backup Unit** 1-15 

Zip Drive** 1-15 

* Component varies by system 

** Built-to-order component 

The system board contains the Pentium II processor mounted in a S.E.C. 

cartridge, system DIMM memory, Intel 440BX PCI/AGP chipset, SMC 

FDC37C777 super I/O controller, Crystal audio controller, ATI ® Rage Pro 

Turbo 2X graphics controller, and hardware monitor. 

Internal connectors on the system board include three DIMM sockets, S.E.C. 

cartridge socket (slot 1 connector), and AGP board connector. 

External connectors on the system board include two serial connectors, a 

parallel connector, two USB ports, keyboard port, mouse port, and external 

audio connectors. 

The system board supports the standard 1.44-MB diskette drive, and up to four 

IDE devices such as a hard drive, CD-ROM drive, and Zip drive.

Riser Board 

Diskette Drive 

Hard Drive 

The system board seats in the NLX connector on the riser board. The system 

board is installed in the chassis along guide rails and is secured with a single 

latch for easy access. 

For further information on the system board, see Section 4, “System Board.” 

Section 6, “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” lists the NEC CSD part number for the 

system board. 

The riser board contains most of the cable connectors in the system, including: 

� primary and secondary IDE connectors 

� diskette drive connector 

� expansion board connectors 

� front panel connector for lamp and infrared signals 

� NLX connector for the system board 

� CD audio in, modem in, Wake-On LAN, chassis intrusion, speaker, and 

fan connectors 

� external LAN connector 

� power connectors 

� system fan and LAN jumpers. 

For further information on the riser board, see Section 5, “Riser Board.” 


riser board. 

A single diskette drive is supported in the system (the BIOS does not support a 

second diskette drive). The installed 1.44-MB 3 1/2-inch diskette drive is 

connected by a single ribbon cable with three connectors. The diskette drive 

cable plugs directly into the riser board. There are no switches or jumpers that 

need to be set and the diskette drive is terminated. 

Connector locations for the diskette drive on the riser board are given in 

Section 5, “Riser Board.” Section 6, “Illustrated Parts Breakdown,” lists the 

NEC CSD part number for the diskette drive. Diskette drive specifications are 

given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

All systems ship with one internal 3 1/2-inch hard drive (1-inch high, thinheight) 

installed in the inner of the two internal drive slots, at the upper rear of 

the system. Drives are available in a 3.2-GB, 4.3-GB, 6.4-GB, and 8.4-GB IDE 

Ultra DMA models. Also available are 4.55-GB and 9.1-GB SCSI drives. 

System Overview 1-11

Power Supply 

Keyboard 

Mouse 

The riser board has two IDE/PCI interface connectors (primary and secondary) 

for connecting IDE storage devices. In systems with an IDE hard drive, a threeconnector 

hard drive IDE cable connects to the IDE hard drive and the primary 

connector on the riser board. Each connector supports up to two IDE devices. 

An optional second IDE hard drive can be added to the primary channel. If the 

second hard drive is installed, it connects to the middle connector on the IDE 

cable. 

In systems with a SCSI hard drive, a four-connector SCSI cable connects the 

drive to the internal SCSI connector on the SCSI adapter board. Up to three 

internal SCSI devices can be added to the cable. 

Hard drive jumper settings are given in Section 2, “System Configuration.” 

Connector locations for the IDE hard drive connectors on the riser board are 

given in Section 5, “Riser Board.” Section 6, “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” 

lists the NEC CSD part numbers for the hard drives. Hard drive specifications 

are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

The power supply is mounted inside the system unit. It supplies power to the 

system board, riser board, option boards, diskette drive, hard drives, CD-ROM 

drive, keyboard, mouse, and other internal options. A fan inside the power 

supply provides system ventilation. The power supply provides 200 watts and is 

NLX-compatible. 

Power supply connector locations on the system board are given in Section 5, 

“Riser Board.” Power supply specifications are given in 

Section 10, “Specifications.” 

The PS/2-compatible ergodynamic keyboard is standard equipment for the 

system. The keyboard provides a numeric keypad, separate cursor control keys, 

12 function keys, and is capable of up to 48 functions. Key status lamps on the 

keyboard include Num (Numeric) Lock, Caps (Capital) Lock, and Scroll Lock. 

The keyboard’s six-pin connector plugs into the back of the system. Keyboard 

pin assignments are included in Section 4, “System Board.” Keyboard 

specifications are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

A Microsoft ® IntelliMouse ® is standard equipment for the system. This PS/2compatible 

mouse has two buttons and a cursor control wheel. The mouse has a 

self-cleaning mechanism that prevents a buildup of dust or lint around the 

mouse ball and tracking mechanism. 

The six-pin mouse cable connector plugs into the back of the system. Mouse pin 

assignments are included in Section 4, “System Board.” Mouse specifications 

are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

1-12 System Overview

AGP Board 

CD-ROM Drive 

Speakers 

Some systems come with a graphics accelerator board preinstalled in the AGP 

slot. The board provides an integrated, advanced MPEG (Motion Picture 

Experts Group), 3D and 2D graphics and video accelerator for exceptional 

graphics and superior quality full-screen, full-motion video. 

Included on the board is a standard VGA output connector for connecting a 

VGA-compatible monitor. 

Graphics modes are given in Section 2, “System Configuration.” Graphics board 


Some systems come with a 32X CD-ROM drive. The drive features up to 

32-speed technology, allowing data to be transferred at up to 4920 KB/second, 

affording faster data transfer and smoother animation and video. The CD-ROM 

drive comes with an Enhanced IDE (EIDE) interface. The drive is fully 

compatible with Kodak Multisession Photo CDs, CD-I, FMV, and CD Plus, 

as well as standard CDs. The CD-ROM drive can also play audio CDs (for 

systems with sound capabilities). 

A three-connector device cable connects the drive to the secondary IDE/PCI 

channel on the riser board. The drive is connected as the master device on the 

secondary channel. An optional second device can be added to the secondary 

channel using the free connector on the three-connector cable. 

CD-ROM jumper settings are included in Section 2, “System Configuration.” 


CD-ROM drive. Specifications for the CD-ROM drive are given in 

Section 10, “System Specifications.” 

Some systems come with a high-quality 9-watt stereo speaker set, an AC 

adapter, and connecting cables. The speaker set features a volume control, 

power on/off switch, power lamp, and treble control. The speaker set also 

includes a subwoofer output jack. The speaker set connects to the speaker line 

out jack on the back of the system. 

Speaker specifications are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

Fax/Modem Board 

Some systems come with a fax/modem board preinstalled. The board operates as 

a fax system and data modem according to the operating system and software 

installed. The modem board offers a full-duplex speakerphone and 56,600 bits 

per second (bps) data/14,400 bps fax communications. 


Sound Board 

The fax/modem board is Plug and Play compatible. There are no switches or 

jumpers to set if the system is running the Window 95 operating system. The 

fax/modem default settings are COM2, IRQ3 for Windows 95. Systems running 

the Windows NT 4.0 operating system must be configured for COM2 and IRQ3. 

See Section 2, “System Configuration,” for information on setting Windows NT 

jumpers. Section 4, “System Board,” and Section 5, “Riser Board,” include 

cable connection information for the fax/modem. Fax/modem board 

specifications are provided in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

Some systems come with a Creative Labs ® AWE-32 sound board in an 

expansion slot. The board incorporates the EMU 8000 Sound Engine for 

32-voice polyphony for wave table audio. SoundFont technology allows the 

creation of customized musical instruments and sound effects. Clear, realistic, 

three-dimensional sound is supported with the Creative 3D Stereo Enhancement 

technology. 

Specifications for the sound board are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

Local Area Network 

All systems come with an onboard local area network (LAN) capability (3COM 

LAN). Through the RJ-45 LAN connector on the riser board, the system can be 

connected to another computer, to a LAN, or to the Internet. Systems also have 

remote startup capability from a server with “Wake-On LAN” technology. 

Specifications for the LAN are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

SCSI Adapter Board 

Systems that ship with an Ultra Wide SCSI hard drive come with an Adaptec 

2940 SCSI adapter board installed in a PCI expansion slot. The SCSI adapter 

board brings the highest performance SCSI I/O technology to the PCI local bus, 

transferring data up to 133 MB/second. The SCSI adapter board is compatible 

with all major operating systems, including SCSI-1, SCSI-2 and SCSI-3 

peripherals, and industry-standard application software. 

The BIOS-resident SCSISelect configuration utility eliminates the need to 

handle jumpers or terminators while adding peripherals. All configuration and 

terminator settings are controlled via the keyboard (see “SCSISelect Utility” in 

Section 2). 

Up to 15 SCSI devices (seven standard internal and eight 16-bit wide internal or 

external, or 15 wide internal and external SCSI devices) can be connected to the 

adapter board. 

1-14 System Overview

PC Adapter Device 

Some systems come with a PC Adapter Device. The PC adapter provides twin 

PC card slots, which support two Type I/II cards, or one Type I/II card and one 

Type III. The adapter supports ISA Plug and Play, and allows cards of mixed 

voltage to be used in the same system. PC cards can provide the system with 

memory, storage, fax/modem capabilities, video capabilities, or a serial port 

interface. The PC adapter driver enables full diskette drive or hard disk 

emulation on flash cards compatible with all compression and PC-utilities 

software. 

The adapter is comprised of a “SwapBox” housed in a 5 1/4-inch accessible slot, 

a PC ISA adapter card, and a dual cable that connects them on the PC adapter 

bus. 

PC adapter device connector locations are given in Section 4, “System Board.” 

PC adapter device specifications are given in Section 10, “Specifications.” 

Tape Backup Unit 

Zip Drive 

Some systems come with a tape backup unit. The tape backup unit is a highcapacity, 

high-performance data storage device that can compress and write data 

to and read and uncompress data from tape. The unit also comes with backup 

software used to tailor the backup process so that some or all of the files on the 

system can be backed up to a tape cartridge. Files backed up to a tape backup 

unit are compressed to conserve space and to speed up the backup process. 

The tape backup unit installs in a 5 1/4-inch accessible slot. The installed tape 

backup unit is connected to an IDE cable that connects to the riser board. The 

PCI/IDE channel, and the master/slave configuration of the unit depend on the 

specific configuration of the system. 

Tape backup unit connector locations on the riser board are given in 

Section 5, “Riser Board.” Tape backup unit specifications are given in 

Section 10, “Specifications.” 

Some systems come with a Zip drive. The Zip drive is a high-capacity, highperformance 

data storage device that writes data on and reads data from Zip 

disks. A Zip disk is flexible media contained in a durable plastic cartridge. The 

Zip drive supports removable Zip disks with a formatted capacity of 100 MB. 

The Zip drive can be used to back up work, archive old files, and transport work 

between computers. 

The Zip drive is installed in a 5 1/4-inch accessible slot. The installed Zip drive 

is connected to an IDE cable that connects to the riser board. The PCI/IDE 

channel, and the master/slave configuration of the drive depend on the specific 

configuration of the system. 

Zip drive cable connections are given in Section 5, “Riser Board.” Zip drive 



System Configuration 

� Interrupt Requests 

� Jumper Settings 

� BIOS Setup 

� Video Modes 

� Utilities 

2

This section provides information for configuring the system. The section 

includes: 

2-2 System Configuration 

� system interrupt request (IRQ) assignments 

� system jumper settings 

� procedures for using the BIOS Setup utility to configure the system 

� descriptions of video modes 

� information on power management 

� descriptions and procedures for using the following utilities and 

applications 

⎯ SCSISelect utility 

⎯ BIOS Update utility 

⎯ LANDesk Client manager 

⎯ NEC Auto Backup utility 

⎯ NEC Select Install CD 

⎯ NEC Driver CD 

⎯ Cheyenne Backup 

⎯ NEC Security 

⎯ NEC SNMP Agent 

⎯ NEC WebTelligent 

Interrupt Requests 

⎯ NEC Configuration Change Notice. 

The following paragraphs list the system interrupts (IRQs), parallel addresses 

and interrupts, and serial addresses and interrupts. Section 4, “System Board,” 

includes information on system resources (memory map, I/O addresses, and 

DMA settings). 

System Interrupts 

The system has 16 IRQs (IRQ 0 through 15) assigned to different devices (for 

example, printer, modem, keyboard, mouse). Initial IRQ settings are assigned at 

the factory, with settings dependent on the installed device(s). Several IRQs are 

unassigned for the installation of add-on devices. See “BIOS Setup” utility in 

this section for information on using the utility to assign or change the 

interrupts.

The following table lists the IRQ settings. Note that assignments 0 through 15 

are in order of decreasing priority. 

Interrupt Level Assignments* 

Interrupt Priority Interrupt Device 

NMI I/O Channel Check 

IRQ00 System Timer 

IRQ01 Keyboard 

IRQ02 Programmable Interrupt Cascade 

IRQ03 COM2* 

IRQ04 COM1* 

IRQ05 LPT2 (plug and play option)/Audio integrated on system 

board/User available 

IRQ06 Diskette Drive Controller 

IRQ07 Parallel Port 1 

IRQ08 Real-Time clock 

IRQ09 User Available 

IRQ10 User Available (SCSI board for SCSI configurations) 

IRQ11 Available (used by network board if present)* 

IRQ12 Mouse 

IRQ13 Reserved, Math Coprocessor 

IRQ14 Primary IDE 

IRQ15 Secondary IDE 

* In Plug and Play systems, these interrupts are typical but may vary by configuration. 

Parallel Port Interrupts 

The parallel port I/O interrupts are given in the following table. The table lists 

all of the possible configurations but the port only uses one set. Any interrupts 

used for the built-in parallel port are not available for ISA parallel ports. 

Port Interrupt 

LPT1 IRQ05 

LPT2 IRQ05 

LPT3 IRQ05 

LPT1 IRQ07 

LPT2 IRQ07 

LPT3 IRQ07 

Parallel Port Interrupts 

System Configuration 2-3

Serial Port Interrupts 

The interrupts for serial port 1 and serial port 2 are given in the following table. 

Any interrupts used for the built-in serial ports are not available for ISA parallel 

ports. Also, if serial ports share an interrupt, verify that hardware and software 

added to the system can share these interrupts without problems. 


Serial Port 1 and Serial Port 2 Interrupts 

Port Interrupt 

COM1 IRQ04 

COM2* IRQ03 

COM3 IRQ04 

COM4 IRQ03 

COM1 IRQ03 

COM2 IRQ04 

COM3 IRQ03 

COM4 IRQ04 

* Serial Port 2 COM2 is used for IrDA data transfer. 

Jumper Settings 

Jumpers on the boards and devices in the system are used to set the system 

configuration. Boards and devices using jumpers include: 

� system board 

� riser board 

� IDE hard drives 

� SCSI hard drives 

� CD-ROM drives 

� fax/modem board 

� Zip drive 

� tape backup unit. 

The following paragraphs list the jumpers and their factory settings. 

Note: Jumpers are set correctly at the factory for the 

system configuration. If a jumper change is required, change 

only the setting for that condition (see Section 4 and 

Section 5 for procedures on setting jumpers).

System Board Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for Configuration Select jumper block J5G1 on the system 

board are shown in the following table. See Section 4 for procedures to reset the 

jumper. Specifications for the system board are included in Section 10. 

System Board Jumper J5G1 Settings 

Function Jumper Pins Description 

Normal 

Mode 

Configure 

Mode 

Recovery 

Mode 

Riser Board LAN Jumper Settings 

1 and 2 Sets the system for normal operation. The BIOS uses the 

current configuration information and passwords for 

booting. Factory setting: pins 1 and 2 jumpered. 

2 and 3 Allows system configuration. After POST runs, the Setup 

utility loads automatically. The Maintenance menu appears 

for setting configuration parameters (including processor 

speed and password settings). 

None Enables BIOS recovery procedures. The BIOS attempts to 

recover the BIOS configuration. A Recovery diskette is 

required (downloadable from the NEC CSD website. 

The factory settings for LAN jumper block JP7 on the riser board are shown in 

the following table. See Section 5 for procedures to reset the jumper. 

Specifications for the riser board are included in Section 10. 

Riser Board LAN Jumper JP7 Settings 


Enable 1 and 2 Enable onboard LAN. Factory setting: pins 1 and 2 

jumpered. 

Disable 2 and 3 Disable onboard LAN. 

Riser Board Fan Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for fan jumper block JP3 on the riser board are shown in the 

following table. See Section 5 for procedures to reset the jumper. Specifications 

for the riser board are included in Section 10. 


Fan Jumper Block JP3 Settings 

2-Wire 1 and 2 Setting for 2-wire fan. Factory setting: pins 1 and 2 

jumpered. 

3-Wire 2 and 3 Setting for 3-wire fan. 


Maxtor IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the Maxtor IDE hard drives are shown in 

the following table. The settings are for a single drive installed in the system. 

Specifications for the hard drives are included in Section 10. 


Maxtor IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings 


Master Device J50-1 and 

J50-2 

Slave Device J50-1 and 

J50-2 

Cable Select 

(CSEL) 

Cylinder 

Limitation 

J48-1 and 

J48-2 

J46-1 and 

J46-2 

Sets hard drive as master device in single drive system. 

Factory setting: pins J50-1 and J50-2 jumpered. 

Sets hard drive as slave. 

Quantum IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

Not used. Factory setting: pins J48-1 and J48-2 open. 

Not used. Factory setting: pins J46-1 and J46-2 open. 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the Quantum IDE hard drives are shown 

in the following table. The settings are for a single drive installed in the system. 


Quantum IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings 


Master Device 

(Drive Select) 

DS-1 and 

DS-2 

Slave Device DS-1 and 

DS-2 

Cable Select 

(CS) 

CS-1 and 

CS-2 

Park PK-1 and 

PK-2 

Sets hard drive as master device in single drive system or 

dual drive system. Factory setting: pins DS-1 and DS-2 

jumpered. 

Sets hard drive as slave in dual drive system. 

Not used. Factory setting: pins CS-1 and CS-2 open. 

Used to park DS jumper when drive set as slave device. 

Factory setting: pins PK-1 and PK-2 open.

IBM IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the IBM IDE hard drives are shown in 

the following table. The settings are for a single drive installed in the system. 


IBM IDE Hard Drive Jumper Settings 


Master Device G and H, 

A and B 

Slave Device C and D, 

A and B 

Cable Select E and F, 

C and A 

Sets hard drive as master device. Factory setting: pins 

G and H jumpered and pins A and B jumpered. 

Sets hard drive as slave in dual drive system. 

Not used. 

Seagate and Quantum SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the Seagate Barracuda SCSI hard drive 

and the Quantum Viking SCSI hard drive are listed in the following table. The 

settings are for a single drive installed in the system. The specifications for the 

SCSI hard drives are included in Section 10. 

Seagate and Quantum SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

SCSI ID No. Jumper Pins SCSI ID No. Jumper Pins 

0 No jumpers 8 A3 jumpered 

1 A0 jumpered 9 A3 and A0 jumpered 


3 A1 and A0 jumpered 11 A3, A1, and A0 jumpered 




7 A2, A1, and A0 jumpered 15 A3, A2, A1, and A0 jumpered 


Western Digital SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the Western Digital SCSI hard drive are 

listed in the following table. The settings are for a single drive installed in the 

system. The specifications for the SCSI hard drive are included in Section 10. 


Western Digital SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings 

SCSI ID No. Jumper Pins SCSI ID No. Jumper Pins 

0 No jumpers 8 7-8 jumpered 

1 1-2 jumpered 9 1-2 and 7-8 jumpered 


3 1-2 and 3-4 jumpered 11 1-2, 3-4, and 7-8 jumpered 




7 1-2, 3-4, and 5-6 jumpered 15 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 jumpered 

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the NEC 32X CD-ROM drive are shown 

in the following table. The drive is set as the master device on the secondary 

channel. Specifications for the CD-ROM drive are included in Section 10. 

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings 

Jumper Jumper Pin Settings 

Cable Select (CS) Not used. 

Slave Present (SL) Disabled, pin 2 open (factory default). 

Enabled, pin 2 jumpered. 

Master Select (MA) Enabled, pin 3 jumpered (factory default). 

Disabled, pin 3 open.

Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM drive 

are shown in the following table. The drive is set as the master device on the 

secondary channel. Specifications for the CD-ROM drive are included in 

Section 10. 

Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Jumper Settings 


Cable Select (CS) Disabled, pins open (factory default). 

Enabled, pins jumpered. 

Slave Present (SL) Disabled, pins open (factory default). 

Enabled, pins jumpered. 

Master Select (MA) Enabled, pins jumpered (factory default). 

Disabled, pins open. 

56-Kbps Fax/Modem Board Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the fax/modem board are as follows. For 

Windows 95 systems, the jumper blocks for COM port and IRQ settings are not 

jumpered (factory default) or are parked on pin 1 of a pair. For Windows NT 

systems, the jumpers settings are shown in the following table. 

56-Kbps Fax/Modem Board Jumper Settings (Windows NT Only) 


COM Jumper Block COM1 — 0 pins, 1 pins, and SEL pins. 

COM2 — 1 pins and SEL pins (factory default). 

COM3 — 0 pins and SEL pins. 

COM4 — SEL pins. 

IRQ Jumper Block Jumpered on pin 3 only. 

Zip Drive Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the Zip drive are shown in the following 

table. The settings description applies when looking at the back of the drive, 

with the IDE connector to the left of the jumper block. The drive is set as the 

slave device on the primary channel. Specifications for the Zip drive are 

included in Section 10. 

Zip Drive Jumper Settings 


Drive 0 Select (Master Drive Select) Right two pin sets jumpered. 

Drive 1 Select (Slave Drive Select) Right-most pin set jumpered. 

Cable Select Mode All three pin sets jumpered. 


Tape Backup Unit Jumper Settings 

The factory settings for the jumpers on the tape backup unit are shown in the 

following table. Specifications for the unit are included in Section 10. 

BIOS Setup 


Tape Backup Unit Jumper Settings 


Cable Select (CS) Not used (pins 1-2 open). 

Master Device (DS) Enabled, DS (pins 5-6) jumpered. 

Disabled, DS (pins 5-6) open (factory default). 

Slave Device (SL) Disabled, SL (pins 3-4) open (factory default). 

Enabled, SL (pins 3-4) jumpered. 

The BIOS Setup utility configures system parameters. The parameters are saved 

in nonvolatile memory in a CMOS chip backed by a battery on the system 

board. The battery supplies continuous power to maintain parameter 

configuration information when system power is off. 

When to Use BIOS Setup 

Note: Before changing parameters or replacing the 

battery, print out or write down the current setup parameter 

settings and store in a safe place. Use this information to 

restore the system to the current parameters if a wrong 

setting is made or if the battery needs replacement (see 

Section 3 for battery replacement). 

The BIOS Setup utility is used to view and set parameters. Use the Setup utility 

to: 

� set the time and date 

� update or check parameters when adding or removing expansion options 

� change or set power management features 

� correct a hardware discrepancy when the Power-On Self-Test (POST) 

displays an error message and prompts to run Setup 

� check the installation of optional memory by comparing the amount of 

memory installed with the amount of memory displayed by Setup 

� change certain operating parameters, such as boot device sequence and 

keyboard parameters 

� configure system connections for peripherals such as diskette drive, hard 

drives, and devices connected to the printer port and serial ports

� customize the system with security features such as passwords, diskette 

drive restriction, virus check reminder, and system backup reminder 

� set system parameters after the CMOS battery is replaced. 

How to Start BIOS Setup 

To start the BIOS Setup utility, follow these steps: 

1. Turn on or reboot the system. 

2. To start the memory test before the system boots up, press F2 after POST. 

There is about five seconds to press F2 before the system boot continues. 

3. Setup’s Main Menu appears and looks similar to the following screen. 

BIOS Setup Main Menu 


How to Use Setup 

Main Menu 

Use the keys shown on the bottom of the Main Menu to make selections or to 

exit the current menu. The following table describes the navigation keys. 

Key Function 


Navigation Keys 

F1 Provides help for the parameter field being displayed. 

Esc Exits the menu 

Enter Executes Command or Selects submenu 

↓ or ↑ arrow keys Moves cursor up and down 

← or → arrow keys Selects next menu 

–/+ Changes values 

F9 Loads the Default Configuration values for this menu 

F10 Save and Exit 

Menu items preceded by > contain a submenu of selectable fields for setting 

system parameters. Display a submenu by using the arrow keys to move the 

cursor to the desired submenu, then press Enter. 

Choose the Main menu by selecting Main in the legend bar on the Main menu 

screen. Other Main menu options are available by selecting submenus. 

Use the arrow keys to select one of the Main menu options and press Enter to 

select a submenu. Items with grayed-out text are not available. Explanations of 

each menu item are in the following paragraphs. 

Displayed Information 

The following read-only information is displayed in the Main menu and cannot 

be changed: 

� BIOS Version 

� Processor Type 

� Processor Speed 

� Cache RAM 

� System Memory 

� Memory Bank 0 

� Memory Bank 1 

� Memory Bank 2.

Language 

ECC Configuration 

The installed language appears in the Setup and BIOS text strings. English (US) 

is the default. Other choices are French, Italian, German, and Spanish. 

This menu turns error reporting on (ECC) or off (non-ECC). The menu is 

displayed only when ECC DIMMs are detected. The default setting is 

Non-ECC. 

L2 Cache ECC Support 

System Time/Date 

This menu enables or disables error checking. The menu is selectable only if the 

system has a 233 MHz or 266 MHz processor. The default setting is Enabled, 

and is the only choice when a faster processor is used. 

This menu sets the time and date. The settings remain in memory even after 

system power is turned off. 

To set the time, enter the current hour, minute, and seconds in hh:mm:ss, 

24-hour format. For example, type 13:30:00 for 1:30 P.M. 

To set the date, enter the current month, day, and year in mm/dd/yyyy format. 

For example, type 11:20:1998 for November 20, 1998. 

Advanced Menu 

Plug & Play O/S 

Selecting Advanced from the Main menu displays a menu with the following 

options. 

The Plug and Play field indicates if the computer’s operating system is 

configured to use Plug and Play devices. Yes is the default setting if using an 

operating system with Plug and Play (Windows 95). No is the default setting if 

using an operating system without Plug and Play (Windows NT 4.0 or other 

operating systems). 

Reset Configuration Data 

Numlock 

Select Yes to clear the PCI/PnP configuration data stored in FLASH ROM on 

the next system reboot. A Yes setting reverts to the No setting after reboot. The 

default setting is No. 

This field controls whether the Num Lock key on the keyboard is On or Off at 

bootup. Auto sets NumLock to the same setting it had before the system was 

rebooted. The default setting is Auto. 


Peripheral Configuration 

This menu configures peripheral devices as they are added, removed, or 

changed. Use the fields in the following table to configure the system when 

making any peripheral changes. 


Peripheral Configuration Parameters 

Menu Item Settings and Description 

Serial Port A Settings: Enabled (default), Auto, Disabled. 

Auto enables the device but the BIOS does not place its 

resources unless the Plug and Play OS option in the BIOS is 

set to No. 

Selecting Enabled enables Base I/O Address and Interrupt. 

Base I/O Address Settings: 3F8 (default), 2F8, 3E8, 2E8. 

An asterisk (*) displayed next to an address indicates a 

conflict with another device. 

This option only appears if Serial Port A is set to Enabled. 

Interrupt Settings: IRQ3, IRQ4 (default). 




Serial Port B Settings: Enabled, Auto, Disabled (default), IrDA 

The default setting for Serial Port B supports the hardware 

shipped with the system. For example, if the system shipped 

with a fax/modem board, Serial Port B defaults to Disabled. 

Auto enables the device but the BIOS does not place its 

resources unless the Plug and Play OS option in the BIOS is 

set to No. 

Selecting Disabled enables Base I/O Address and Interrupt. 

Base I/O Address Settings: 3F8, 2F8 (default), 3E8, 2E8. 




Interrupt Settings: IRQ3 (default), IRQ4. 



This option only appears if Serial Port A is set to Enabled.

Peripheral Configuration Parameters 


Parallel Port Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default), Auto 

The parallel port device can be auto detected when Auto is 

selected. With Auto, the first free LPT port is assigned. Auto 

enables the device but the BIOS does not place its 

resources unless the Plug and Play OS field is set to No. 

Selecting Enabled enables Mode, Base I/O Address, 

Interrupt, and DMA Channel. 

Mode Settings: Output Only, Bi-directional (default), EPP, ECP. 

This option only appears if Parallel Port is set to Enabled. 

Base I/O Address Settings: 278, 378 (default), 228. 




Interrupt Settings: IRQ7 (default), IRQ5. 




An interrupt set to IRQ5 in a multimedia system might 

conflict with the audio subsystem settings. 

DMA Channel Settings: DMA1 (default), DMA3 

DMA is not displayed when Mode B is Bi-directional. The 

DMA field is only displayed when the Parallel Port field is set 

to Enabled and the Mode field is set to ECP. 

Audio Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default). 

Select Disabled if an audio board is installed. 

Legacy USB Support Settings: Disabled (default), Enabled. 


IDE Configuration 

This menu configures IDE devices as they are added, removed, or changed. Use 

the fields in the following table to configure the system when making any IDE 

device changes. 


IDE Device Configuration Parameters 


IDE Controller Settings: Disabled, Primary, Secondary, Both (default). 

This field enables the primary, secondary, or both interface 

connectors on the riser board. 

Hard Disk Delay Settings: Disabled (default), 3, 6, 9,12, 15, 21, 30 seconds. 

Primary IDE Master 

Primary IDE Slave 

Secondary IDE Master 

Secondary IDE Slave 

The hard drive pre-delay gives the drive time to spin up 

before the system boots. Set a hard drive pre-delay if the 

drive needs more time to spin up. 

Settings: Device Type, Maxtor 3.2 (varies per configuration) 

Settings: Device Type, None 



Each Device Type displays the hard drive or CD-ROM drive 

identifier for the device installed. 

If installing a hard drive without auto IDE type detection or 

the hard drive was formatted on another system with 

parameters different from those reported by the drive, enter 

a parameter for each of the following fields in the device 

submenu: Type, Cylinders, Heads, Sectors, Maximum 

Capacity, Multi-Sector Transfers, LBA Mode Control, 

Transfer Mode, Ultra DMA 

Press Enter to bring up a device submenu. 

Type Settings: None, IDE Removable, ATAPI Removable, 

CD-ROM, User, Auto (default). 

Defaults to Auto and changes at boot time based on autodetection. 

When set to Auto, the values are auto-set for Cylinders, 

Heads, Sectors, and Maximum Capacity. The parameters 

displayed are read only. 

If a drive is run in a mode other than the mode in which it 

was partitioned and formatted, unpredictable results may 

occur, including data loss. 

Cylinders When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Cylinders field is 

auto-detected and the field is read only. 

Heads When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Cylinders field is 

auto-detected and the field is read only. 

Sectors When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Cylinders field is 

auto-detected and the field is read only.

Floppy Options 

IDE Device Configuration Parameters 


Maximum Capacity Displays capacity in MB. 

When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Maximum 

Capacity field is computed from the auto-detected values in 

Cylinders, Heads, and Sectors. The fields are read only. 

Multi-Sector Transfers Settings: Disabled, 2 Sectors, 4 Sectors, 8 Sectors, and 

16 Sectors (default). 

When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Multi-Sector 

Transfers field is auto-detected. The field is read only. 

LBA Mode Control Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default). 

When Enabled is selected, it causes logical block 

addressing to be used in place of cylinders, heads, and 

sectors. 

When Type is set to Auto, the value in the LBA Mode 

Control field is auto-detected and the field is read only. 

Transfer Mode Settings: Standard, Fast PIO Mode 1, Fast PIO Mode 2, 

Fast PIO Mode 3, Fast PIO Mode 4 (default), FPIO3 & Bus 

Mastering, FPIO4 & Bus Mastering. 

When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Transfer Mode 

field is auto-detected. The field is read only. 

Ultra DMA Settings: Disabled (default), Mode 0, Mode 1, Mode 2. 

When Type is set to Auto, the value in the Ultra DMA field is 

auto-detected. The field is read only. 

This menu configures the floppy (diskette) drive device whenever it is removed 

or its settings need to be changed. Use the fields in the following table to 

configure the system when making any diskette drive changes. 

Floppy Drive Options 

Menu Item Settings and Descriptions 

Floppy Disk Controller Settings: Enabled (default), Disabled. 

This field enables the diskette drive interface connector on 

the riser board. 

Diskette A: Settings: Disabled, 360 KB 5 1/4”, 1.2 MB 5 1/4”, 720 KB 3 

1/2”, 1.44/1.25 MB 3 1/2” (default), 2.88 MB 3 1/2”. 

Floppy Write Protect Settings: Disabled (default), Enabled. 

Set the field to Enabled to write-protect diskettes. 


DMI Event Logging 

This menu keeps track of system events. Use the fields in the following table to 

configure DMI events. 


DMI Event Logging 


Event Log Capacity This field is read-only and cannot be changed from the BIOS 

Setup utility. 

Example: Space Available 

Event Log Validity This field is read-only and cannot be changed from the BIOS 

Setup utility. 

Example: Valid 

View DMI Event Log [Enter] 

Press Enter to view the DMI Event Log. 

Clear all DMI Event Logs Settings: No (default), Yes. 

Select Yes to clear all DMI event logs upon rebooting. 

Reverts to No after the reboot. 

Event Logging Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default). 

Enabled allows logging of DMI events. 

Prompt on POST Errors Settings: Enabled (default), Disabled. 

When set to Enabled and errors are detected during POST, 

the POST pauses and prompts for user input. 

ECC Event Logging Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default). 

Mark DMI Events as Read [Enter] 

This field is only displayed when ECC DIMMs are detected. 

Press Enter to bring up the dialog box asking for 

confirmation that the events should be marked as read. 

If no events have been logged, the Mark DMI Events As 

Read field is read-only.

Video Configuration 

This menu is used to set video palette snooping and AGP Aperture size fields. 

Use the fields in the following table to set the video configuration. 

Video Configuration 


Palette Snooping Settings: Disabled (default), Enabled. 

Sets palette snooping (RAMDAC shadowing) to Enabled when 

ISA graphics device installed under following conditions: 

An ISA board connects to the PCI graphics board via the VESA 

compatible feature connector. 

The ISA board connects to a color monitor. 

The board used the RAMDAC on the PCI board. 

The palette snooping feature is broken on the PCI board. 

AGP Aperture Size Settings: 64 MB (default), 256 MB. 

Resource Configuration 

Sets the amount of memory to be shared between graphics and 

system functions.. 

This menu is used to set resource configurations. Use the fields in the following 

table to set the resource configurations. 

Resource Configuration 


IRQ3 

IRQ4 

IRQ5 

IRQ7 

IRQ10 

IRQ11 

IRQ14** 

IRQ15** 

Settings: Available (default), Reserved. 

An Available setting for any IRQ indicates that the specified IRQ 

is available on the system. A Reserved setting indicates that the 

specified IRQ is reserved for use by Legacy ISA devices. 

** This option appears only if the secondary IDE channel is 

disabled. 

Memory Hole Settings: Disabled (default), Conventional, Extended. 

C800 – CBFF 

CC00 – CFFF 

D000 – D3FF 

D400 – D7FF 

D800 – DBFF 

DC00 – DFFF 

The Disabled setting indicates that there is no hole enabled in 

upper memory. The Conventional setting indicates a 128 KB 

conventional memory hole in the system RAM starting at 512 

KB. The Extended setting indicates a 1-MB extended memory 

hole in system RAM starting at 15 MB. 

Settings: Available (default), Reserved. 

An Available setting indicates that the specified block of upper 

memory is available on the system. A Reserved setting 

indicates that the specified block of upper memory is reserved 

for use by Legacy ISA devices. 


Keyboard Configuration 

Security Menu 

This menu is used to set keyboard configurations. Use the fields in the following 

table to set the keyboard configurations. 


Keyboard Configuration 


Key Click Settings: Disabled (default), Enabled. 

This field turns the audible key click on or off. 

Keyboard Auto-repeat Rate Settings: 2x, 6x, 10x, 13.3x, 18.5x, 21.8x, 26.7x, 

30x (default) sec. 

This field sets the number of times per second a keystroke is 

repeated when a keyboard key is held down. 

Keyboard Auto-repeat Delay Settings: 1/4 sec, 1/2 sec (default), 3/4 sec, 1 sec. 

This field controls the delay before characters begin 

repeating when a keyboard key is held down. 

Selecting Advanced from the Main menu displays the security options listed in 

the following table. 

Security Menu Options 


User Password is: Settings: Clear (default), Set. 

Supervisor Password is: Settings: Clear (default), Set. 

Set User Password [Enter] 

This field indicates if a password is set, but is read-only. Set 

or change the password using the Set User Password 

option. 

This field indicates if a password is set, but is read-only. Set 

or change the password using the Set Supervisor Password 

option. 

Use this field to set or change the user password. Press 

Enter to bring up the dialog box where the password can be 

entered and confirmed. 

Do not create a user password that is a subset of the 

supervisor password. Doing this may cause the system to 

only respond to the user password. If this occurs, only userlevel 

access is allowed until the password is cleared from 

the BIOS Setup utility after jumpering the system board (see 

Section 4 for jumper settings).

Power Menu 

Security Menu Options 


Set Supervisor Password [Enter] 

Clear User Password [Enter] 

User Setup Access Settings: Enabled, Disabled. 

Use this field to set or change the supervisor password. 

Press Enter to bring up the dialog box where the password 

can be entered and confirmed. 

Press Enter to clear the user password when logged on as 

Supervisor. 

When both the User Password and Supervisor Password 

are enabled, only the Supervisor Password gives full access 

to all Setup fields. 

When User Setup Access is set to Enabled, the user has 

read-only access to the BIOS Setup utility. 

Unattended Start Settings: Disabled (default), Enabled. 

This field controls the point at which the user password is 

required. When set to Disabled, the user is prompted for the 

password before the system can boot. 

When set to Enabled and a user password is set, the system 

can complete a boot and run without prompting the user for 

a password (except when booting from a diskette). However, 

the keyboard is locked. The user password must be entered 

to unlock it. 

This field is read-only if no user password is set. 

Power management reduces the amount of energy used after specified periods of 

inactivity. The Power menu options are listed in the following table. 

Note: Power management is only supported in systems 

running Windows 95. 

Power Menu Options 


Power Management Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default). 

When set to Enabled, all other Power Management options 

can be configured. 


Boot Menu 


Power Menu Options 


Inactivity Timer Settings: Off, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes (default), 30 

minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours. 

Sets how long the system must remain inactive before it enters 

a power saving suspend mode. 

Hard Drive Settings: Disabled, Enabled (default). 

When set to Enabled, the hard drive is subject to power 

management. 

VESA Video Power Down Settings: Standby (default), Disabled, Suspend. 

When set to Enabled, video is subject to power management. 

The Boot menu offers the options listed in the following table. 

Boot Menu Options 


Boot Time Diagnostic 

Screen 

(Quiet Boot) 

Settings: Disabled (default), Enabled. 

When set to Disabled, the NEC splash screen displays instead 

of the POST screen during boot. 

Quick Boot Mode Settings: Enabled (default), Disabled. 

When set to Enabled, certain tests are skipped during boot, to 

decrease the time it take to boot. 

Virus Check Reminder Settings: Disabled (default), Daily, Weekly, Monthly. 

When set to Daily, Weekly, or Monthly, the system displays a 

virus check reminder message during boot up. 

System Backup Reminder Settings: Disabled (default), Daily, Weekly, Monthly. 

When set to Daily, Weekly, or Monthly, the system displays a 

system backup reminder message during boot up. 

Fixed Disk Boot Sector Settings: Normal (default), Write Protect. 

When set to Write Protect, the fixed disk boot sector is writeprotected 

against viruses. 

After Power Failure Settings: Power On, Stay Off, Last State (default). 

When After Power Failure is set to Power On, the system 

powers on after a power failure. With the Stay Off setting, the 

system does not power on after a power failure. With the Last 

State setting, the system powers on only if it was powered on 

when the power failure occurred. 

If the After Power Failure field is set to Stay Off, the On LAN 

boot option does not work, even if the On LAN field is set to 

Enabled.

Boot Menu Options 


Floppy Check Settings: Enabled (default), Disabled 

On Modem Ring Settings: Power On (default), Stay Off. 

Enables an external modem to work even when the system is 

in a power reduction state. Full power is restored to the system 

so it can receive the modem ring when the setting is Power 

On. 

On LAN Settings: Power On (default), Stay Off 

Enables the system to be contacted via a LAN even when in a 

power reduction state. On LAN does not work if the After 

Power Failure option is set to Stay Off. 

On PME Settings: Stay Off (default), Power On 

First Boot Device 

Second Boot Device 

Third Boot Device 

Fourth Boot Device 

Fifth Boot Device 

Controls how the system responds to a PCI Power 

Management Enable (PME) wake up event. 

Select a boot device from the option list with the up or down 

arrow, then press the plus or minus key to change the device 

boot order. 

The Fifth Boot Device option only appears when an Intel Pro 

100 LAN board is installed. 

Example: 

Removable Devices 

ATAPI CD-ROM Drive 

Hard Drive 

Network Boot 

MBA 

Hard Drive IDE drives. IDE drives are identified by auto-typing. Select an 

IDE device from the option list with the up or down arrow, then 

press the plus or minus key to change the device boot order. 

Bootable ISA Cards. Select an ISA card from the option list 

with the up or down arrow, then press the plus or minus key to 

change the card’s boot order. 

Removable Devices Removable devices are identified by auto-typing. The first 

device in the list is the bootable device. 

Select a device from the option list with the up or down arrow, 

then press the plus or minus key to change the device boot 

selection. 


Exit Menu 

Selecting the Exit menu displays the exit options listed in the following table. 


Exit Menu Options 


Exit Saving Changes Saves the setting just made and exits BIOS. 

Exit Discarding Changes Discards the changes just made and reverts back to the 

settings existing before starting the BIOS session. 

Load Setup Defaults Reverts to the factory-shipped settings. 

Maintenance Menu 

The Maintenance menu only appears when the system board has been jumpered 

for Configure mode. (See Section 4, “System Board” for system board jumper 

settings.) When the system is restarted in Configure mode, the Setup utility 

launches automatically and comes up in the Maintenance menu. (The Main, 

Advanced, Power Management, Security, Boot, and Exit menus are also 

available.) 

The Maintenance menu provides access to the options listed in the following 

table. 

! CAUTION 

Starting the system in Configure mode resets BIOS settings 

to their factory defaults. Before jumpering for Configure 

mode, write down any customized BIOS settings. When the 

system is started in Normal mode, press F2 to bring up the 

BIOS Setup utility. Re-customize the BIOS settings. 

Maintenance Menu Options 


Processor Speed Sets the following processor speeds: 

233 MHz, 266 MHz, 300 MHz, 333 MHz, 350 MHz, 

366 MHz, 400 MHz, 450 MHz 

Clears All Passwords [Enter] 

Clears the User and Supervisor passwords. 

Press Enter to open a dialog box asking for confirmation 

that the passwords should be cleared.

Video Modes 

Systems come with an AGP board preinstalled in the system. Depending on the 

graphics board installed, it comes with either 4 MB or 8 MB of synchronous 

graphics random access memory (SGRAM). 

To take full advantage of the computer’s installed video board and extended 

graphics modes listed below, use the video driver that comes preinstalled on the 

system. The default video mode is 800 by 600 pixels with 256 colors. 

The system supports the following 2D display mode resolutions, colors, and 

refresh rates: 

� 640 by 480 pixels, 256/65K/16.7 million colors, 200 Hz (maximum) 





� 1600 by 1200 pixels, 256/65K colors with 4-MB SGRAM, 85 Hz 

maximum 

� 1600 by 1200 pixels, 16.7 million colors with 8-MB SGRAM, 75 Hz . 

For 3D display modes, the system supports: 

� 800 by 600 pixels, 16.7 million colors (4-MB SGRAM) 

� 1024 by 768 pixels, 65K colors (4-MB SGRAM) 

� 1280 by 1024 pixels, 16.7 million colors (8-MB SGRAM) 

� 1600 by 1200 pixels, 65K million colors (8-MB SGRAM). 


Utilities 

The following table lists each utility and application shipped with the system, 

and the page where its description is found. 

SCSISelect Utility 


System Utilities 

Utility See Page 

SCSISelect Utility 2-26 

BIOS Update Utility 2-26 

LANDesk Client Manager 2-27 

NEC Auto Backup 2-31 

NEC Select Install CD 2-31 

NEC Driver CD 2-46 

Cheyenne Backup 2-49 

NEC Security 2-49 

NEC SNMP Agent 2-50 

NEC WebTelligent 2-53 

NEC Configuration Change Notification 2-58 

Select the SCSI Select utility at boot up. Press Ctrl-A as soon as the SCSI utility 

information appears on the screen. If the BIOS information appears, reboot, as 

the system has gone past the SCSI utility screen. 

Use the SCSI Select utility to set drive termination, new SCSI ID number, 

configure the host adapter, or format a new SCSI drive. 

To set a new SCSI ID, select the SCSI Device Configuration menu. With the 

arrow keys, select Send Start Unit Command. Change the unit ID number from 

No to Yes. 

BIOS Update Utility 

The system BIOS resides on a flash ROM in the system. The flash ROM can be 

updated, should it become necessary. This feature allows the ROM BIOS chip to 

be flashed with new BIOS code through software, rather than replacing the chip. 

Update the BIOS with a BIOS flash diskette containing the latest version of the 

BIOS code. The diskette can be obtained from NEC Computer Systems Division 

or the latest BIOS can be downloaded from the NEC CSD Bulletin Board 

Service (BBS) onto a diskette. The BIOS can also be downloaded from the 

NEC CSD website. (See Section 9, “NEC CSD Information Services,” for 

procedures on downloading a file.)

Update the BIOS from the BIOS flash diskette as follows 

1. Write down the Setup parameters currently set on the system. 

2. Turn off the system. 

3. Insert the BIOS flash diskette in drive A and turn on the system. 

� When the flash upgrade menu appears, choose Update Flash Memory 

Area from a file. 

� When the menu asks for a path/filename, use the arrow keys to select the 

“.bio” file and press Enter. 

� At the screen asking for confirmation to load the new flash into 

memory, select Continue with Programming. 

4. After the upgrade completes, remove the BIOS flash diskette. 

5. Reboot the system and start the Setup program. 

6. Press F9 to reset the BIOS defaults. 

7. Set the parameters from the copy made at the beginning of the session. 

LANDESK Client Manager 

LANDesk ® Client Manager (LDCM) is a software program provided with the 

computer. LDCM uses the Desktop Management Interface (DMI) standard to 

manage components (network interface cards, memory, software applications) 

within a client (local) or remote (workstation) PC system. It provides features 

for managing the resources of a local PC and can be used by system 

administrators to manage groups of computer systems. 

With Client Manager, the following tasks can be performed: 

� using the Wake-On LAN feature, get remote systems on the network up 

and running from a powered-off state (for example, to perform off-hour 

maintenance) 

� review system inventory of workstation hardware and software 

components 

� view DMI-compliant component information 

� set security features to change password (local machine) or enable/disable 

the serial ports, printer, or diskette drive (system administrator) 

� back up and restore system configuration files 

� back up system and application software using the NEC Auto Backup 

utility 

� troubleshoot 

� receive notice of system events (for example, if the system is running low 

on memory, you are notified of the potential problem) 


� detect changes to CPU, memory, and hard drive characteristics and alert 

you to these changes (Configuration Change Notification) 

� transfer files to and from client workstations 

� remotely reboot client workstations. 

There are two main components of Client Manager: PC Health Indicator and 

Inventory. 

PC Health Indicator 

PC health indicator consists of three parts: 

� managing workstations 

� selecting the PC Health meter 

� monitoring PC Health. 

For managing workstations, Client Manager sets up a connection to all the 

workstations running on the network to allow the administrator to monitor the 

functions of each workstation. 

The monitoring is in real time so that if an unhealthy workstation is fixed, the 

screen can be refreshed to view the new correct PC health. The monitor can also 

be set to report only unhealthy workstations. 

The PC Health meter is a traffic signal that provides a visual indicator of 

workstation health. 

� A red light indicates that a critical system event has occurred. The user is 

required to fix the problem immediately. 

� A yellow light or noncritical system event requires that the user monitor 

the situation. It may be a problem that could get worse and become a 

critical event. 

� A green light indicates everything is working fine with the system. 

The description of PC health is determined by monitoring various system 

components for threshold levels. Some of the components that are monitored 

include: 

� drive space 

� prediction of hard drive failure (Smart Hard Drive failure prediction) 

� free virtual memory 

� temperatures 

� power supplies 

� chassis opened 

� GDI used 

2-28 System Configuration

Inventory 

DMI 

� non-critical boot failure 

� boot virus detection. 

Once a threshold level has been passed on a workstation, the user can request 

notification of the problem and have it written into a log file. 

Client Manager Inventory views the hardware and software components of the 

workstation. The inventory consists of the following categories: 

� workstation summary 

� basic hardware 

� drives 

� memory 

� audio 

� keyboard/mouse 

� video 

� system resources 

� I/O ports 

� operating system 

� network 

� applications 

� system files 

� user information. 

The user can also view the current system configuration, edit user information, 

and create or restore file snapshots. 

As a part of the LANDesk Client Manager, the Desktop Management Interface 

(DMI) is the standard interface used to manage system components on the 

computer. Examples of system components are network interface cards and 

software applications. System components provide a Management Information 

Format (MIF) file to be DMI-compliant. The information file describes 

component attributes that can be managed. 

Client Manager can be used to “get” attribute information on system 

components. It can also be used to “set” attribute values in real time. 


Monitoring Capabilities 

An NEC MagicEye Technology chip on the system board supports many new 

and advanced real-time monitoring capabilities used by DMI. The chip provides 

the following: 

� an integrated temperature sensor with configurable interrupt generation 

based on upper and lower temperature limits 

� a power supply monitor with configurable interrupt generation based on 

upper and lower voltage limits 

� chassis intrusion detection with interrupt generation capabilities (see 

“Using the Chassis Intrusion Notification Feature”). 

To take advantage of these features, DMI has expanded its interface in the 

following areas. 

� Interrupts may be enabled or disabled. 

� High and low limits can be set and are displayed for temperature and 

power supply voltages. 

� Current readings are displayed for temperature, power supply voltages, 

and chassis state. 

� Interrupts can be detected when “out of range” conditions occur. User 

prompts are displayed to alert the user to a potentially harmful condition. 

Using the Chassis Intrusion Notification Feature 

LANDesk Client Manager allows the user to monitor the system against chassis 

intrusion. Whenever the chassis is opened, LANDesk Client Manager logs the 

intrusion and reports the incident in a screen message the next time the system is 

booted. The message appears in a LANDesk Client Manager Notification 

window. The window appears every time the system is rebooted until the report 

is cleared. 

Close the notification window to remove the message from the screen. Clear the 

message to prevent it from appearing again the next time the system is rebooted. 

To clear the message, follow these steps. 

1. Access LANDesk Client Manager. 

� If the LANDesk Client Manager Notification window is still open, click 

Yes, and then click the Client Manager button. 

� From the Windows desktop, click Start on the taskbar, point to 

Programs, point to LANDesk Client Manager, and click LANDesk 

Client Manager 3.1. 

� LANDesk Client Manager opens. 

2-30 System Configuration

2. Open the Tools menu and click PC Health. The PC Health window appears. 

The Chassis Opened field displays the Yes setting. 

3. Click Clear next to the Chassis Opened field. 

4. Exit from LANDesk Client Manager. 

NEC Auto Backup 

On systems that use the Windows 95 operating system, NEC Auto Backup is a 

data management and backup program that operates in conjunction with 

LANDesk Client Manager’s DMI and the Self-Monitoring Analysis and 

Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.) Hard Drive instrumentation. If the 

S.M.A.R.T. drive identifies a potential problem, the NEC Auto Backup utility 

automatically invokes the Cheyenne Backup program and backs up the entire 

file system to a user-selected backup device, such as a tape drive, Zip drive, or 

network drive. 

NEC Auto Backup can also do regularly-scheduled backups and scan files for 

viruses during a backup operation. 

NEC Select Install CD 

Note: For the NEC Auto Backup utility to work, 

Cheyenne Backup must be preconfigured. See the NEC 

Auto Backup utility “Read Me” file for information about 

Cheyenne Backup. 

The system comes with an NEC Select Install compact disc (CD). The CD 

contains all the system software files that came with the computer, including the 

operating system, device drivers, applications, the NEC Help Center online 

user’s guide, and the Healthy Environment file. Should a problem occur that 

causes data loss or corruption, use the CD to restore the system files to the 

computer. 

The Select Install CD reinstalls all or part of the computer’s software. 

Depending on the operating system and the way the Select Install CD is used, 

one or more of the following can be done: 

� operating system (OS) restore with disk rebuild (deletes all data on the 

disk) 

� operating system (OS) restore only, for systems running the Windows 95 

operating system (preserves data on the disk) 

� selective application and/or documentation restore. 

The OS Restore programs and the Selective Application Restore program use 

easy-to-understand dialog boxes and screen messages for the restore process. 


Choosing a Restore Program 


Note: The system also comes with the NEC Driver CD. 

The CD contains the drivers installed on the system and a 

full set of optional drivers compatible with hardware options 

offered by NEC CSD. See “NEC Driver CD” for information 

about installing or restoring drivers. 

It’s important to choose the appropriate restore program. In some uses, the 

program can delete all the data, as well as the operating system and/or 

applications on the hard drive. Check the following list to verify that the 

program being selected fits the restore conditions. 

� Repartition and/or reformat the hard drive and restore the operating 

system (“Auto” or “Custom”). 

If a catastrophic system failure occurs, use the OS restore to repartition 

and reformat the hard drive and restore the operating system. Using the 

program is the first phase of a full system restore. After restoring the OS, 

continue with a Selective Application Restore. 

See “Rebuilding the Hard Drive and Restoring the Operation System,” 

and under it, either “Auto Rebuild and Restore” or “Custom Rebuild and 

Restore.” 

� Restore only the operating system (“Fix OS”). 

If rebuilding the hard drive is not required, use the OS Restore to reinstall 

only the operating system (for systems running the Windows 95 

operating system). It is not necessary to perform a selective application 

restore after reinstalling the operating system. 

See “Restoring the Operating System.” 

� Restore some or all of the applications and online documentation that 

came on the NEC Select Install CD. 

The Selective Application Restore takes place after the Windows OS has 

booted. It allows choosing the application software to reinstall. Use this 

program to restore selected applications from the CD after rebuilding the 

hard drive, or at any time to reinstall a software package that came with 

the computer. 

See “Installing Applications” in this section and Appendix A, “NEC 

PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes,” for details on installing 

applications. 

! CAUTION 

If possible, back up the data before performing an OS 

restore.

Rebuilding the Hard Drive and Restoring the Operating System 

The OS Restore allows repartitioning and/or reformatting the hard drive and 

then reinstalling Windows 95 or Windows NT from the CD. Rebuild the disk 

and reinstall the operating system in one of two ways: 

� Auto, to perform a standard rebuild and restore 

� Custom, to rebuild and restore with greater control over restore functions. 

Note: The Auto and Custom programs repartition 

and/or reformat the hard drive before reinstalling the 

operating system. 

To only reinstall the operating system in a Windows 95 

system while leaving applications and data files intact, see 

“Restoring the Operating System.” 

The following sections explain how to use the NEC Select Install CD to rebuild 

and restore the system. See “Auto Rebuild and Restore” to repartition and 

reformat the hard drive with the OS restore. See “Custom Rebuild and Restore” 

for more options when repartitioning and/or reformatting the hard drive with the 

OS restore. 

After performing an OS restore that also repartitions and/or reformats the hard 

drive, run a Selective Application Restore to reinstall any application that came 

with the system. See “Installing Applications” for directions on running this 

program. 

Auto Rebuild and Restore 

To perform an auto OS Restore which also repartitions and reformats the hard 

drive, boot the system from the Select Install CD. When the system boots from 

the CD, it automatically loads the MS-DOS ® -based Operating System Restore 

program. 

! CAUTION 


restore. 

Follow these steps to rebuild the hard drive and restore the original, factoryinstalled 

operating system using OS Restore: 

1. Power on or restart the system and immediately insert the Select Install CD 

into the CD-ROM drive. 



Note: For systems with a SCSI hard drive, a bootable 

diskette is included with the NEC Select Install CD. In SCSI 

systems, first boot the system from the bootable diskette. 

After the system boots, proceed with the NEC Select Install 

procedure described below. 

After the system boots from the CD, the Operating System Restore 

Welcome screen appears (see the following figure). 

Welcome Screen 

2. Click Continue to continue (or Exit to exit the program). 

A License Agreement screen appears with three options: Back, Reject, and 

Accept. 

� The Back button returns to the Welcome screen. 

� The Reject button terminates the restoration process. 

� The Accept button signals acceptance of the terms of the license and 

allows the program to continue. 

3. Read the license agreement and click Accept to continue. 

The Restore Mode screen appears with four options: Back, Auto, Custom, 

and Fix OS. 

� The Back button returns to the License Agreement screen. 

� The Auto button selects a restore process designed for basic users who 

require limited manual control of restore functions. 

� The Custom button selects a more advanced restore process for users 

who want more control of restore functions.

� The Fix OS button selects a restore process that reinstalls the operating 

system but leaves the applications and data files intact (for systems 

running the Windows 95 operating system). This button does not appear 

if the Windows NT operating system is running. 

Click Custom or Auto to repartition and/or format the hard drive before 

reinstalling the operating system. 

To only reinstall the operating system while leaving applications and data 

files intact, see “Restoring the Operating System.” 

4. Click Auto to do a basic operating system restore. 

After clicking Auto in Windows 95, the Partition Information screen 

appears. (In Windows NT 4.0, the FAT16 Partition warning screen appears 

as described later in this procedure.) 

5. The Partition Information screen that appears in Windows 95 has three 

options (Back, FAT 16, and FAT 32). The screen allows selection of the File 

Allocation Table (FAT) type wanted to use for the operating system restore: 

� Click Back to return to the Operating Mode screen. 

� Click FAT 16 to select the FAT16 allocation table (current FAT type). 

� Click FAT 32 to select the FAT32 allocation table (available for 

Windows 95 systems only). 

Some older software may not work in a Windows 95 system configured for 

FAT 32. 

In Windows NT 4.0 systems, the Partition Information screen does not 

appear. Instead, the FAT16 Partition warning appears. This screen is 

described in the following step. 

6. After selecting the FAT type, a warning screen appears indicating that the 

system is about to partition and format the hard drive using the FDISK 

program. This warning screen contains three options: Back, Exit, and 

Continue. 

� Click Back to return to the Partition Information screen. 

� Click Exit to terminate the restore process. 

� Click Continue to perform FDISK. 

7. If Continue is clicked, the system performs FDISK using the FAT type 

selected and reboots the system. After the reboot, all partitions are 

formatted. When all the partitions have been formatted, the OS loads from 

the CD. The Installing Applications screen appears. This screen also 

displays the version of the Windows OS being installed. 


The drivers and other software components required for the OS are also 

loaded from the CD. 

After the OS finishes loading, the “Operating System Restore Completed” 

screen appears. 

8. Remove the CD from the CD tray. 

9. Click OK to reboot. 

This completes the Auto Rebuild and Restore procedure. 

To reinstall any of the applications or device drivers that came with the 

computer, follow the procedures in “Installing Applications” and in 

Appendix A, “NEC PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes.” 

To install drivers that didn’t come with the computer follow the procedures in 

“NEC Driver CD.” 

Custom Rebuild and Restore 

To perform a custom OS Restore with choices on repartitioning and/or 

reformatting the hard drive, boot the system from the Select Install CD. When 

the system boots from the CD, it automatically loads the MS-DOS-based 

Operating System Restore program. 


! CAUTION 


restore. 

Follow these steps to perform a customized restore of the original, factoryinstalled 

operating system using OS Restore. 

1. Power on or restart the system and immediately insert the Select Install disc 


Note: For systems with a SCSI hard drive, a bootable 

diskette is included with the NEC Select Install CD. In SCSI 

systems, first boot the system from the bootable diskette. 

After the system boots, proceed with the NEC Select Install 

procedure described below. 


Welcome screen appears (see the following figure).

Welcome Screen 



Accept. 



� The Accept button signals acceptance of the terms of the license and 

allows the program to continue. 



and Fix OS. 





who want more control of restore functions. 




if running the Windows NT operating system. 



Note: Click Custom or Auto to repartition and reformat 

the hard drive before reinstalling the operating system. 

To only reinstall the operating system while leaving 

applications and data files intact, see “Restoring the 

Operating System.” 

4. Click Custom on the Restore Mode screen if customizing the OS restore. 

After clicking Custom, the integrity of the system’s existing FAT table is 

verified. If the table is functional, a Partitioning the Hard Drive screen 

appears with options allowing retention of the present partition structure or 

to partition the hard drive using FAT16 or FAT32. 

Note: If the existing partition table is not functional, the 

system automatically follows the Auto restore scheme 

described in the previous section, “Auto Rebuild and 

Restore.” 

5. To partition the hard drive, go to step 7. Otherwise, click Skip on the 

Partitioning the Hard Drive screen to retain the present partition structure on 

the hard drive. 

The Format Mode screen appears with four options: Back, Quick, Full, and 

Exit. 


� Click Quick to do a quick hard drive format. 

� Click Full to do a full hard drive format. 


6. After selecting the type of hard drive format wanted (Quick or Full), the 

Formatting Drive(s) screen appears with a status bar showing the progress of 

the formatting. 

After the disk has been reformatted, the Installing Applications screen 

appears, indicating the status of the restore process as the operating system 

loads from the CD. This screen also displays the version of Windows OS 

being installed. 

The drivers and other software components required for the operating 

system are also loaded from the CD. 


screen appears. Skip to step 9.

7. To partition the hard drive, click Continue on the Partitioning the Hard 

Drive screen. The Partition Information screen appears (in Windows 95 

systems only; in Windows NT 4.0 systems, the FAT16 Partition warning 

appears as described later in this procedure). 

The Partition Information screen has three options and allows selection of 

the File Allocation Table (FAT) type wanted to use for the operating system 

restore. 

� Click Back to return to the Operating Mode screen. 

� Click FAT 16 to select the FAT16 allocation table (current FAT type). 

� Click FAT 32 to select the FAT32 allocation table (available for 

Windows 95 systems only). 

Some older software may not work in a Windows 95 system configured for 

FAT 32. 

In Windows NT 4.0 systems, the Partition Information screen does not 

appear. Instead, the FAT16 Partition warning appears. This screen is 

described in the following step. 

8. After selecting the FAT type, a warning screen appears indicating that the 

system is about to partition and format the hard drive using the FDISK 

program. This warning screen contains three options: Back, Exit, and 

Continue. 



� Click Continue to perform FDISK. 

If clicking Continue, the system performs FDISK using the FAT type 

selected and reboots the system. After the reboot, all partitions are 

formatted. When all the partitions have been formatted, the OS loads from 

the CD. The Installing Applications screen appears. This screen also 

displays the version of Windows OS being installed. 

The other software components required for the operating system are also 

loaded from the CD. 





This completes the Custom Rebuild and Restore procedure. 


To reinstall any of the applications or device drivers that came with the 

computer, follow the procedures in “Installing Applications” and in Appendix 

A, “NEC PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes.” 

To install device drivers that did not come with the computer, follow the 

procedures in “NEC Driver CD.” 

Restore the applications or drivers that were not provided by NEC by using the 

vendor diskettes(s) or CD-ROM(s) included in its original packaging. 

Restoring the Operating System 

To perform an OS Restore only (the “Fix OS” procedure) for systems running 

the Windows 95 operating system, boot the system from the Select Install CD. 

When the system boots from the CD, it automatically loads the MS-DOS-based 

Operating System Restore program. 

If possible, back up the data files before performing an OS restore. 

Follow these steps to restore only the operating system without repartitioning or 

reformatting the hard drive. 

1. Power on or restart the system and immediately insert the Select Install disc 


For systems with a SCSI hard drive, a bootable diskette is included with the 

NEC Select Install CD. In SCSI systems, first boot the system from the 

bootable diskette. After the system boots, proceed with the NEC Select 

Install procedure described below. 


Welcome screen appears (see the following figure). 


Welcome Screen



Accept. 



� The Accept button signals acceptance of the terms of the license and the 

program continues. 



and Fix OS. 





who want more control of restore functions. 




if running the Windows NT operating system. 

Click Fix OS to only reinstall the operating system while leaving 

applications and data files intact (in a system running the Windows 95 

operating system). 

To repartition and/or reformat the hard drive before reinstalling the 

operating system, see “Rebuilding the Hard Drive and Restoring the 

Operating System.” 

4. Click Fix OS to do a basic operating system restore. 

After clicking Fix OS, the Fix OS screen appears. This screen has two 

options: Back and Continue. 

� Click Back to return to the License Agreement screen. 

� Click Continue to proceed with the OS restore. 

5. Click Continue to proceed with the OS restore. After clicking Continue, 

the Installing Applications screen appears. This screen also displays the 

version of Windows OS being installed. The installation can take from 5 to 

10 minutes. 

The drivers and other software components required for the operating 

system are also loaded from the CD. 






8. If one or more “Version Conflict” dialog boxes appear, click Yes in 

response to the “Do you want to keep this file?” message(s). 

9. Enter your name and registration number where indicated in the next dialog 

box. 

10. In the Date/Time Properties dialog box, enter the correct time zone and click 

Close. 

11. Proceed through the Printer Wizard dialog boxes to install a printer or click 

Cancel. 

This completes the OS Restore (or “Fix OS”) procedure. Proceed to the next 

section (see “Installing Applications” or “NEC Driver CD”). 

Installing Applications 

The Selective Application Restore takes place once the Windows OS is running 

and lets you choose the application software to install or reinstall. Use this 

program to restore selected applications from the CD after rebuilding the hard 

drive, or at any time to install a software package or device driver that came on 

the NEC Select Install CD. 


! CAUTION 

Before installing any applications from the NEC Select Install 

CD, refer to Appendix A, “NEC PowerMate 8100 Series 

Release Notes,” for the correct installation order. 

Follow these steps to install any of the operating system files or device drivers 

that were factory installed on the hard drive or any of the applications that came 

on the CD. 

Note: To install drivers that were not factory installed on 

the hard drive, see “NEC Driver CD.” 

1. With the operating system running, insert the Select Install CD in the 

CD-ROM drive tray. 

The CD autorun feature generates the NEC Selective Application Restore 

Program screen (see the following figure).

Note: Only the applications that work with the system’s 

OS appear in the Select Install Program screen. For 

example, if the OS is Windows 95, but there are applications 

for both Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 on the CD, only 

the drivers required for Windows 95 appear. 

NEC Selective Application Restore Screen 

2. Select the applications to install by double clicking on the item box or line. 

A check mark appears in the box. 

To deselect an item, double click it again so that the check mark disappears. 

Items that appear grayed-out are already installed on the system. 

3. Click OK. 

The application files reload sequentially, and a progress bar appears for each 

application selected. 

4. When all the applications have finished installing, remove the CD. 

5. Click Restart Computer to reboot and ensure that the installation process 

completes successfully. 

This completes the Selective Application Restore procedure. 

After the Selective Application Restore process completes, install any optional 

device drivers using the NEC Driver CD (see “NEC Driver CD). 

In addition, after the Selective Application Restore process completes, reinstall 

any personal applications. These applications are not on the NEC Select Install 

CD and must be reinstalled after the Selective restore process completes. 


Using the NEC Select Install CD with a SCSI Drive 

If a situation arises in SCSI configurations where a full operating system restore 

must be performed using the NEC Select Install CD, first boot the system from 

the bootable diskette. (This might be necessary, for example, if the system does 

not boot from the hard drive.) The bootable diskette comes with all systems that 

have a SCSI hard drive. After the system boots, proceed with the NEC Select 

Install procedure described above. 

Using the Selective Application Restore Program on a Remote CD 

If the computer is connected to a network and set up to access a shared 

CD-ROM drive, a System Administrator can install the applications associated 

with the OS from the NEC Select Install CD in the remote CD-ROM drive. 

The following procedure applies for both Windows 95 and Windows NT 

systems. Differences in the procedure for each OS are noted as they occur. 


! CAUTION 




1. In Windows 95 systems only, set up the system for sharing files as follows. 

On Windows NT systems, go to step 2. 

� Press the Start button, scroll up and select Settings, then highlight and 

select Control Panel from the submenu. 

� Double click the Network icon. 

� Click the File and Print Sharing button. 

� Click the top box (“I want to be able to give others access to my files”) 

so a check mark appears. 

� Click OK. The driver installs and the system reboots. 

2. Insert the NEC Selective Install CD into the shared CD-ROM drive. 

3. Do a map connection to the shared CD-ROM drive. 

� From the system with the shared CD-ROM drive, double click My 

Computer and right click on the CD-ROM drive. (For example, right 

click on E: if the shared CD-ROM drive is designated as drive E.) 

� In the popup menu, right click on Sharing. The Properties screen 

appears. 

� In the Properties screen, click Shared As.

� On Windows 95 systems, type a name in the Share Name field. (For 

example, type CD-ROM in the field.) 

On Windows NT systems, click the New Share button, then type a 

name in the Share Name field. (For example, type CD-ROM in the 

field.) 

� Click OK to return to the Properties screen. 

4. On the Client desktop, double click Network Neighborhood. 

5. Double click Entire Network. 

6. Click the name of the computer with the shared CD-ROM drive. Double 

click the name of the shared CD-ROM drive. 

7. To install the operating system files, or any of the device drivers or 

applications that NEC CSD provided with the system, double click the 

setup.exe program. 

The NEC Selective Application Restore screen appears. 

NEC Selective Application Restore Screen 

Note: To install additional drivers, see “NEC Driver CD.” 

8. Select the applications or drivers to install by double clicking on the item 

box or line. A check mark appears in the box. 

To unselect an item, double click it again so that the check mark disappears. 

9. Click OK. 

The application, driver, or documentation files load sequentially, and a 

progress bar appears for each application selected. 


10. When all the selected files have finished installing, remove the CD. 

11. Click Restart Computer to reboot and ensure that the installation process 

completes successfully. 

NEC Help Center Online Documentation 

NEC CSD has included an online NEC Help Center on the NEC Select Install 

CD. Use the Selective Application Restore program to provide access to all the 

information provided with the computer. 


! CAUTION 




To configure the system to use the NEC Help Center, first install Microsoft 

Internet Explorer 4.01. Then proceed with the guidelines in “Installing the NEC 

Help Center Online Documentation.” 

To uninstall the NEC Help Center, follow the instructions in “Uninstalling the 

NEC Help Center.” 

The NEC Select Install CD also comes with an online brochure, “Healthy 

Environment.” Install this brochure using the instructions in “Installing 

Applications.” 

Installing the NEC Help Center Online Documentation 

Follow the instructions in “Installing Applications” to install the NEC Help 

Center online documentation and the Healthy Environment online brochure. The 

NEC Help Center and Healthy Environment are in the list of applications that 

appear when the Selective Application Restore program is run. They are 

installed in the same manner as the applications and drivers in the list. 

Install Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 on the system before installing the NEC 

Help Center. The Help Center requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 to run 

and it cannot be installed using the Selective Application Restore program 

unless Internet Explorer 4.01 has already been installed. 

Uninstalling the NEC Help Center 

Uninstall the NEC Help Center as follows. 

1. Access the C:\Program Files\nechlpct directory. 

2. Double click the Unwise.exe icon. All files related to the NEC Help Center 

and the C:\Program Files\nechlpct directory are removed from the system.

NEC Driver CD 

The system comes with an NEC Driver CD. The CD contains the device drivers 

that were delivered on the system, and a full set of optional drivers that 

correspond to hardware options offered by NEC CSD. If installing optional 

hardware in the system, or make other system enhancements, use the NEC 

Driver CD to install the drivers required for system operation. 

Read this section in its entirety before using the NEC Driver CD to install any 

optional drivers on the system. 

Installing Drivers With the NEC Driver CD 

Follow these steps to install optional drivers that have not been factory-installed 

on the hard drive. 

! CAUTION 

Do not select and install drivers for any hardware that is not 

currently installed on the system. Doing so can damage the 


1. Install the device requiring the new driver before installing the driver. 

2. With the operating system running, insert the NEC Driver CD into the 

CD-ROM drive. 

The CD autorun feature launches the NEC Driver CD window. 

3. Access the subdirectory that corresponds to the driver being installed. 

4. Double click the setup.exe icon corresponding to the driver being installed. 

! CAUTION 

When running a setup.exe program, do not select and install 

drivers for any hardware that is not currently installed on the 

system. Doing so can damage the operating system. 

5. Follow the prompts in the installation wizard to install the driver. 

6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each driver being installed. 

7. Restart the computer to ensure that the installation process completes 

successfully. 

Installing Drivers From a Remote CD 

If the computer is connected to a network and set up to access a shared 

CD-ROM drive, a System Administrator can install the optional drivers from the 

NEC Driver CD in the remote CD-ROM drive. 


The following procedure applies for both Windows 95 and Windows NT 

systems. Differences in the procedure for each operating system are noted as 

they occur. 


! CAUTION 

Do not select and install drivers for any hardware that is not 

currently installed on the system. Doing so can damage the 


1. Install the device requiring the new driver before installing the driver. 

2. In Windows 95 systems only, set up the system for sharing files as follows. 

On Windows NT systems, go to step 3. 

� Click Start, select Settings, then highlight and select Control Panel. 

� Double click the Network icon. 

� Click File and Print Sharing. 

� Click the top box (“I want to give other access to my files”) so a check 

mark appears. 

� Click OK. The driver installs and the system reboots. 

3. Insert the NEC Driver CD into the shared CD-ROM drive. 

4. Do a map connection to the shared CD-ROM drive. 

� From the system with the shared CD-ROM drive, double click My 

Computer and right click on the CD-ROM drive. (For example, right 

click on E: if the shared CD-ROM drive is designated as drive E.) 

� In the popup menu, right click on Sharing. The Properties screen 

appears. 

� In the Properties screen, click Shared As. 

� On Windows 95 systems, type a name in the Share Name field. (For 

example, type CD-ROM in the field.) 

On Windows NT systems, click the New Share button, then type a 

name in the Share Name field. (For example, type CD-ROM in the 

field.) 

� Click OK to return to the Properties screen. 

5. On the Client desktop, double click Network Neighborhood. 

6. Double click Entire Network. 

7. Click the name of the computer with the shared CD-ROM drive. Double 

click the name of the shared CD-ROM drive.

8. Access the subdirectory that corresponds to the driver being installed. 

9. Double click the setup.exe icon corresponding to the driver being installed. 

! CAUTION 

When running a setup.exe program, do not select and install 

drivers for any hardware that is not currently installed on the 

system. Doing so can damage the operating system. 

10. Follow the prompts in the installation wizard to install the driver. 

11. Restart the computer to ensure that the installation process completes 

successfully. 

Cheyenne Backup 

NEC Security 

Cheyenne Backup is a data management and backup program, available on 

systems running the Windows 95 operating system. This program is separate 

from but integrates into the Intel LANDesk Client Manager’s Smart Hard Drive 

Auto-Backup Utility and the NEC Backup Utility. If hard drive performance 

degrades due to bad sectors or other internal problems, the Smart Hard Drive 

utility automatically invokes the Cheyenne Backup program and backs up the 

entire file system to a Zip drive or to a network drive. 

Note: Cheyenne Backup does not work in conjunction 

with an ATAPI tape drive. 

Cheyenne Backup can also do regularly scheduled backups and scan files for 

viruses during a backup operation. 

On systems that run the Windows 95 operating system, NEC Security features 

allow a local user to change NEC Security passwords and enable a system 

administrator to control local machine devices, including printer ports, serial 

ports, and diskette drives. 

Note: The NEC Security password is different from the 

password(s) that can be set through the BIOS Setup Utility. 


NEC SNMP Agent 

The NEC Desktop Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Agent is an 

extension to the Microsoft SNMP Agent. The NEC SNMP Agent permits a 

network administrator to manage NEC PowerMate clients. The NEC SNMP 

Agent performs the following major functions: 

� Assets Management — displays system serial number, product model, 

and more. 

� Configuration Management — displays memory size and more. 

� Help Desk Support — provides information such as BIOS versions. 

� Alert Notification — provides alerts when thresholds are exceeded (for 

example, when temperatures exceed specified limits in a computer). 

SNMP managed devices on a network send messages (traps) when a preset level 

of device activity occurs. Notification of events with SNMP traps is sent to a 

network manager upon reaching either a user-specified over-threshold or underthreshold 

condition for any supported management information base (MIB) 

variable. 

The following paragraphs describe how to install and configure the NEC SNMP 

Agent on Microsoft Windows 95 or Microsoft Windows NT configured 

systems. 

Installing the NEC SNMP Agent 


! CAUTION 

Before installing the NEC SNMP Agent from the NEC Select 

Install CD, refer to Appendix A, “NEC PowerMate 8100 

Series Release Notes,” for the correct order in which to 

install applications. 

The NEC SNMP Agent software is on the NEC Select Install CD. Install the 

software on a Windows 95 or Windows NT configured system as follows. (The 

NEC SNMP Agent software can also be downloaded from the NEC CSD 

website at www.nec-computers.com.) 

! CAUTION 

Do not install both the NEC SNMP Agent and LANDesk 

Client Manager on the same computer. 

1. Close all open applications before installing the NEC SNMP Agent. 

2. Insert the NEC Select Install CD into the CD-ROM drive. Click Cancel 

when prompted.

3. Click Start on the taskbar, point to and click Run, and type 

E:\NECUtil\NEC_SNMP\setup.exe 

where E: is the CD-ROM drive. 

4. Click OK and follow the prompts to install the software. 

Configuring the NEC SNMP Agent for Windows 95 

The SNMP Agent is configured with the Windows 95 Policy Editor. The Policy 

Editor configures the traps, communities, and other policies. 

Use the Policy Editor to configure the traps, communities, and other policies as 

follows. 

1. In the Windows taskbar, click Start, and point to Programs, Accessories, 

and System Tools. Click System Policy Editor. 

2. At the “System Policy Editor,” click File and point to Open Registry. 

Double click Local Computer. 

3. Expand Network and expand SNMP to display the list of policies. The 

policies are: 

� Communities — Specifies one or more groups of hosts that this 

computer belongs to and that can be managed with SNMP. 

� Permitted Managers — Limits the set of SNMP management 

applications that can access this computer to those with the IP or IPX 

addresses that the user provides. 

� Traps for “Public” Community — Limits the set of computers that 

receive traps from this computer to those with the IP or IPX addresses 

that the user provides. 

Note: For an SNMP management console, such as the 

NEC Desktop Manager and HP OpenView, IP addresses 

(for example, 157.123.176.100) must be entered in the 

Traps for “Public Community” to receive traps from the NEC 

SNMP agents. 

For the NEC SNMP Agent to send a trap to the NEC SNMP 

Desktop Manager, the port number can be configured from 

the registry: 

"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Packard Bell 

NEC,Inc.\PBNEC SNMP Desktop Agent\Port Number". 

The default port number is set to 55593. 

� Internet MIB (RFC 1156) — Allows the user to specify a contact name 

and location for the Internet MIB. 


4. Check each policy required and highlight the policy name. 

� For Communities, Traps, and Permitted Managers, click Show and 

configure the policy as appropriate. 

� Highlighting the Internet MIB policy opens the contact name and 

location fields in the Policy window for editing. 

� Click File and click Save. 

� Click File and click Exit. 

Configuring the NEC SNMP Agent for Windows NT 

Configure the NEC SNMP Agent for Windows NT as follows. 

1. In the Windows taskbar, click Start, point to Settings, and click Control 

Panel. 

2. At the Control Panel, double click the Network icon. 

3. At the Network screen, click the Services tab and click Add. 

4. At the Select Network Services screen, highlight SNMP Service, and click 

OK. 

5. At the Microsoft SNMP Properties screen, there are three properties that 

must be set: 

� Security — Limits the set of computers than can perform SNMP 

management on this computer to those in the community and/or specific 

computer names the user provides. 

� Traps — Limits the set of computers that receive traps from this 

computer to those in the community and/or specific computer names the 

user provides. 


Note: For an SNMP management console, such as the 

NEC Desktop Manager and HP OpenView, IP addresses 

(for example, 157.123.176.100) must be entered in the 

Traps for “Public Community” to receive traps from the NEC 

SNMP agents. 

For the NEC SNMP Agent to send a trap to the NEC SNMP 

Desktop Manager, the port number can be configured from 

the registry: 

"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Packard Bell 

NEC,Inc.\PBNEC SNMP Desktop Agent\Port Number". 

The default port number is set to 55593. 

� Agent — Allows the user to specify a contact name and location for the 

computer.

6. Edit the properties. 

7. Click OK to return to the Network screen. 

8. Click Close to return to the Windows screen. 

NEC WebTelligent 

NEC WebTelligent is a web-based desktop management system that works 

with Intel LANDesk Client Manager (LDCM) version 3.1 or later, Desktop 

Management Interface (DMI) version 2.0, and the world wide web to perform 

administrative tasks across multiple platforms, either locally or remotely over a 

network. 

Through NEC WebTelligent, the managed client desktop PC administrator can 

manage from a desktop computer using the Netscape or Microsoft Internet 

Explorer web browser. 

The administrator can perform WebTelligent account and asset management, 

monitor the “health” of networked systems, and receive alert notifications from 

managed clients. 

NEC WebTelligent is an easy-to-use web-based graphical user interface that 

runs on the Netscape and Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers (see the 

following figure). 

NEC WebTelligent Features 


NEC WebTelligent provides the administrator with the following features and 

benefits. 

� WebTelligent Account Management 

⎯ Create and delete user accounts 

⎯ Change user passwords 



⎯ Disable user accounts 

� Asset Management 

⎯ Discovery of networked DMI desktops 

⎯ Display system and hardware component attributes 

� System Health Monitoring 

⎯ Set threshold limits for voltage and system temperature 

⎯ Generate alert for high voltage, temperature, or fan speed 

⎯ Generate alert for chassis intrusion 

� Session Management 

⎯ Online help 

⎯ View system and log events 

� Security 

⎯ Intranet user authentication 

⎯ Chassis intrusion monitoring 

� Reduced Costs 

NEC WebTelligent Requirements 

⎯ WebTelligent is free with the purchase of an NEC PowerMate 

Managed desktop computer 

⎯ WebTelligent is available as a free download from the NEC CSD 

website (www.nec-computers.com). 

WebTelligent installs on a Windows 95 or Windows NT web server with the 

following minimum configuration: 

� Intel Pentium microprocessor 

� 32 MB of random access memory 

� 20 MB of hard drive space 

� Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System or Windows NT 4.0 Operating 

System and associated web server software 

⎯ Microsoft Windows 95 with Microsoft Personal Web Server version 

1.0 or later 

⎯ Microsoft Windows NT with Peer Web Server version 2.0 or later

⎯ Microsoft Windows NT with Microsoft Internet Information Server 

version 3.0 or later 

⎯ Microsoft Windows NT with Netscape FastTrack Server version 2.0 

or later or Netscape Enterprise version 3.01 or later 

� One or more Internet Browsers 

⎯ Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later 

⎯ Netscape Navigator Gold 3.03 or later 

⎯ Netscape Communicator 4.0 or later 

� TCP/IP. 

WebTelligent works with networked computers having the following minimum 

configuration: 

� Intel Pentium microprocessor 

� 32 MB of random access memory 

� Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 operating system 

� Intel LDCM 3.1 

� DMI version 2.0 

� NEC Auto Discovery Agent 

� TCP/IP. 

NEC WebTelligent Installation 

The NEC WebTelligent software and the NEC Auto Discovery Agent software 

are on the NEC Select Install CD. Install the software onto a Windows 95 or 

Windows NT web server as follows. 

! CAUTION 

Before installing NEC WebTelligent from the NEC Select 



install the application. 

1. Close all open applications before installing WebTelligent and Auto 

Discovery Agent. 

2. Install the web server software on a machine with a host name such as 

PowerMate-A. Set up the web server as follows. 

� Install the web server software (Microsoft Personal Web Server or 

other – see the preceding list). 


� On the Windows desktop, click Start, point to Settings, and click 

Control Panel. 

� At the Control Panel, double click Personal Web Server. 

� In Personal Web Server, click the Administration tab. 

� In Administration, click Administration to start the web browser. 


If the web browser does not start, click the Startup tab, click Start, click 

the Administration tab, and click Administration to start the browser. 

3. Install the WebTelligent software on the web server using the NEC Select 

Install CD. 

! CAUTION 

Before installing NEC WebTelligent from the NEC Select 



install the application. 

� Insert the NEC Select Install CD into the CD-ROM. 

� Click Cancel in the screen. 

4. Click Start on the taskbar, point to and click Run, and type 

E:\NECUtil\WebTelig\Admin\setup.exe 

where E: represents the CD-ROM drive. 

5. Click OK and follow the prompts to install the software. 

� Follow the WWW Administration link, click the Directories tab, and 

edit the home page. 

� Modify the directory entry to C:\Program 

Files\PBNEC\WebTelligent\html and click OK. 

� Scroll to the bottom of the page and set the default document to 

login.html. 

� Click OK. 

6. Install the NEC Auto Discovery Agent software on a managed client. 

Note: Before installing the NEC Auto Discovery Agent 

software on a client, check to see if it is already installed. 

Look for the directory 

C:\Program files\PBNEC\WebTelligent Discovery Agent. 

If it is not there, install the software from the NEC Select 

Install CD or download it from the NEC CSD website 

(www.nec-computers.com).

7. Open and configure WebTelligent as follows. 

Note: LDCM 3.1 must be installed on every client. 

� At a managed desktop computer, start a web browser. 

� Set the URL to the web server’s machine name (for example: 

http://PowerMate-A). 

� At the Login screen (see the following figure), enter the following. 

⎯ At the username field, type Admin 

⎯ At the password field, type Admin 

Note that Admin must use a capital A and that the password can be 

changed after the first login. 

NEC WebTelligent Login Screen 

� Click Login. The WebTelligent control screen displays (see the 


� Click Discover on the WebTelligent control screen to collect a list of 

machines to manage. 

� Double click the Network icon on the WebTelligent control screen and 

click on the domain name to locate the desktop being managed. 



NEC WebTelligent Control Screen 

� Click on the desktop to be managed. 

� A Workstation screen opens to display a summary of the workstation 

attributes. 

� When finished, click File and click Close to go back to the Windows 

screen. 

NEC Configuration Change Notification 

NEC Configuration Change Notification is an application that runs as Windows 

starts. It works with the LANDesk application and DMI (Desktop Management 

Interface) software to determine if there has been a change in the processor, 

main memory, or hard drive since the last startup. A message appears on the 

screen when a change is detected. 

Install NEC Configuration Change Notification from the NEC Select Install CD. 

See “Installing Applications” in this section for installation procedures.

3 

Disassembly and Reassembly 

� System Unit Cover Removal 

� Chassis Floor Removal 

� Expansion Board Removal 

� Front Panel Removal 

� Blank Panel and Metal Slot Cover Removal 

� Expansion Board Guide Removal 

� Switch Board/IR Panel Assembly Removal 

� DIMM Module Removal 

� AGP Board Removal 

� Processor Subsystem Removal 

� 5 1/4-Inch Device Removal 

� 3 1/2-Inch Hard Drive Removal 

� 3 1/2-Inch Diskette Drive Removal 

� Power Supply Removal 

� System Board Removal 

� Riser Board Removal 

� CMOS Battery Removal

This section contains step-by-step disassembly procedures for the system unit. A 

simplified disassembly illustration is provided with most procedures. Section 6 

includes a parts list and an illustrated parts breakdown showing an exploded 

view of the system. 

A Phillips-head screwdriver is the only required tool. For complete disassembly 

of the system unit, follow the disassembly order listed in the following table. To 

reassemble, follow the table and procedures in reverse order. 

Individual removal procedures do not require the total disassembly of the 

computer. Each of the following subsections lists the parts that must be removed 

before beginning the removal procedure. 

3-2 Disassembly and Reassembly 

PowerMate 8100 Series Disassembly Sequence 

Sequence Part Name See Page 

1 System unit cover 3-3 

2 Chassis floor 3-7 

3 Expansion board 3-11 

4 Front panel 3-12 

5 Blank panel and metal slot cover 3-13 

6 Expansion board guide 3-14 

7 Switch board/IR panel 3-14 

8 DIMM memory module 3-15 

9 AGP board 3-16 

10 Processor subsystem 3-17 

11 5 1/4-inch device 3-18 

12 3 1/2-inch hard drive 3-19 

13 3 1/2-inch diskette drive 3-20 

14 Power supply 3-21 

15 System board 3-22 

16 Riser board 3-26 

17 CMOS battery 3-27 

When disassembling the system unit, follow these general rules. 

� Before opening the system or handling boards or chips, touch the frame 

to discharge static. 

� Disconnect all peripherals before disassembling the system unit. 

� Do not disassemble parts other than those specified in the procedure. 

� All screws are Phillips-head, unless otherwise specified.

� Label any connector before removing it. Note where the connector goes 

and in what position it was installed. 

On completion of any reassembly, perform a power-on test. If a fault occurs, 

verify that the reassembly was performed correctly. 

! CAUTION 

Before handling boards or chips, ground yourself to release 

static. 

System Unit Cover Removal 

The following subsections describe how to remove and replace the system unit 

cover. 

Note: For systems with LANDesk ® Client Manager, a 

chassis intrusion is reported to the Client Manager whenever 

the cover is removed. When this occurs, a LANDesk Client 

Manager Notification message displays every time the 

system is turned on. Close the window to remove the 

message from the screen. To prevent the message from 

appearing again, clear the message from the system (launch 

LANDesk Client Manager, open the Tools menu, click 

PC Health, and click Clear). 

! CAUTION 

Electrostatic discharge can damage computer components. 

Discharge static electricity by touching a metal object before 

removing the system unit cover. 

Disassembly and Reassembly 3-3

Removing the System Unit Cover 

Remove the system unit cover as follows. 

! WARNING 

Before removing the system unit cover, turn off the power 

and unplug the system power cable. Power is removed only 

when the power cable is unplugged. 

1. Turn off and unplug the system unit. 

2. Unplug the keyboard, mouse, monitor, and any other device (such as a 

printer) connected to the back of the system. 

3. If a chassis lock is installed in the Kensington ® Security Standard connector 

on the back of the chassis, remove it. 

4. If a padlock is installed in the chassis locking tab on the back of the chassis, 

remove it. 

Note: Do not remove the stand from the system unit 

when removing the cover. The stand is designed to keep the 

unit from tipping over. 

5. Loosen the three cover thumb screws on the back of the system unit (see 

the following figure). 


Loosening Cover Screws 

6. Slide the cover back about one-half inch. If necessary, hold the back of the 

chassis while sliding the cover back.

7. Lift up at the top of the cover to release the cover tabs from the chassis (see 


8. Pull the cover up until it comes free of the chassis. 

Note: The following figures show the stand removed for 

purposes of clarity while performing the procedures. Do not 

remove the stand unless there is a specific need. 

Removing the Cover 

9. Lift the cover up and away from the system unit. 


Replacing the System Unit Cover 

Replace the system unit cover as follows. 

Note: To prevent damage to system cables, carefully 

tuck the cables out of the path of the cover. 

1. Position the cover over the chassis with its front edge about one-half inch 

behind the front edge of the chassis. 

2. Fit the cover into the chassis, making sure that the tabs along the lower left 

edge of the cover are aligned with the securing rail on the edge of the chassis 

(see the following figure). 


Aligning the Cover 

3. Slide the cover forward to meet the securing rail behind the front panel. 

Note: The cover fits tightly. If the cover does not slide 

all the way to the front panel, place one hand on the front of 

the unit while sliding the cover forward from the rear. 

4. Secure the cover with the three thumb screws, and install the security lock 

(if used). 

5. Reconnect all external peripherals. 

6. Plug in all power cords.

Chassis Floor Removal 

Before installing or removing expansion boards or the system board, the chassis 

floor and stand must be removed, usually as a unit. . 

Removing the Chassis Floor 

Remove the chassis floor as follows. 

Note: Do not remove the stand from the floor before 

removing the floor. The following procedure should be 

performed with the stand attached to the chassis floor. 

1. Remove the system unit cover. 

2. Place the system unit on its right side. 

3. Loosen the thumb screw holding the floor to the chassis. 

Locating the Chassis Floor Thumb Screw 


4. Slide the floor back about one-half inch along the chassis. 

5. Once the floor tabs are free of the slots in the chassis, lift the floor and stand 

away from the chassis (see the following figure). 

Replacing the Chassis Floor 


Removing the Chassis Floor 

Replace the chassis floor as follows. 

1. Place the system unit on its right side. 

2. Line up the chassis floor with the chassis so its untabbed edge is along the 

lower right edge of the chassis. 

3. Ensure that the tabs along the upper edge of the floor are lined up with the 

slots in the upper edge of the chassis. 

4. Press the floor up against the bottom of the chassis. 

5. Slide the floor toward the front of the chassis to lock the tabs in the slots. 

6. Secure the floor to the chassis with the thumb screw

Removing the Stand 

Remove the stand as follows. 

! WARNING 

Keep the system unit in the stand unless the computer is 

being prepared for shipment or if the stand requires 

replacement. The stand is designed to keep the unit from 

tipping over. 

1. Remove the system cover as previously described. 

2. Hold the stand in place, press down on the locking tab, and slide the system 

unit back about one-half inch (see the following figure). This unlocks the 

tabs connecting the stand to the chassis slots. 

Removing the Stand 

3. Lift the system unit off the stand. 


Replacing the Stand 

Replace the stand as follows. 

! WARNING 

To prevent tipping, always place the system unit back in its 

stand before using the computer. 

1. Place the system unit over the stand with its front edge about one-half inch 

behind the front of the stand. Align the tabs on the stand with the slots on the 

floor of the chassis (see the following figure). 


Aligning the System Unit With the Stand 

2. Slide the unit forward to lock the tabs in the slots (see the following figure). 

Securing the System Unit in the Stand 

3. Replace the system unit cover as previously described.

Expansion Board Removal 

Remove any installed expansion board(s) as follows. 

1. Remove the system unit cover and chassis floor as previously described. 

2. Label and disconnect any cables connected to the board. 

Note: If removing an expansion board from one of the 

lower expansion slots, remove the AGP board from the 

system (see “AGP Board Removal” later in this section). 

3. Remove and save the screw securing the board to the support bracket (see 


Removing the Expansion Board 

4. Pull the board straight out of the connector. Do not rock a PCI expansion 

board from side to side to release it from the connector. 

5. Place the slot cover over the slot and secure it with the slot cover screw. 

6. Replace the chassis floor and system unit cover as previously described. 


Front Panel Removal 

Remove the front panel assembly from the chassis as follows. 

1. Remove the system unit stand and cover as previously described. 

2. Remove the front panel as follows. 

� Squeeze and release the locking tab on the lower left side of the back of 

the front panel. 

� Remove the front panel by evenly and carefully pulling the panel from 

the chassis. 

The panel is secured to the chassis with five pop-in plugs (tabs) that fit 

into corresponding slots in the chassis (see the following figure). 

Use care to prevent pulling on the LED and IR cables attached to the 

panel. 

� Label and disconnect the LED and IR cables from the back of the panel. 


Removing the Front Panel

Blank Panel and Metal Slot Cover Removal 

Remove the blank panel from the front panel and the metal slot cover from the 

chassis as follows. 

1. Remove the front panel as previously described. 

2. Remove the blank panel from the selected slot by pressing the blank panel 

tabs and pushing the blank panel out (see the following figure). 

Removing the Blank Panel 

3. Remove the perforated metal panel from the slot on the front of the chassis. 

It may be secured with two screws or it may be a break-away panel. 


Expansion Board Guide Removal 

Remove the expansion board guide as follows. 

1. Remove the system unit cover, floor, and front panel as previously 

described. 

2. Locate the board guide on the front inner wall of the chassis. 

3. Press the top and bottom sides together to release the locking tabs securing 

the board guide to the chassis. 

4. Pull the board guide away from the chassis wall and out of the chassis. 

Switch Board/IR Panel Assembly Removal 

The switch board/IR panel assembly consists of a switch board, IR panel, and 

the cable that connects them. The power, reset, and suspend switches plus the 

power lamps and disk lamps are on the switch board. The IR sensor is on the IR 

panel. A feature connector at the rear of the switch board panel carries signal 

and power for each these functions through a single cable to the riser board. 

Remove the switch board panel assembly as follows. 


described. 

2. Locate the feature connector on the back of the switch board panel. 

� The connector is accessed from the interior of the chassis, through a 

cutout in the chassis wall. 

� Unplug the cable from the feature connector. 

3. Remove the screws from the front of the switch board panel. 

4. Remove the switch board panel. 

5. Remove the IR panel from the front of the chassis. 

3-14 Disassembly and Reassembly

DIMM Module Removal 

Remove a DIMM module from the system board as follows. 

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord. 

2. Remove the system unit cover and floor (see “Removing the System Unit 

Cover”). 

3. Locate the DIMM sockets on the system board. 

4. Eject the module by pressing the plastic clips at the outer edges of the 

DIMM socket away from the memory module (see the following figure). 

Removing a DIMM Module 


AGP Board Removal 

Remove an AGP board as follows. 

Note: If removing a PCI graphics board, use the 

removal procedures for an expansion board (see “Expansion 

Board Removal”). 

1. Remove the system unit cover and floor (see “Removing the System Unit 

Cover”). 

2. Remove the screw on the rear of the chassis and carefully lift the graphics 

board out of the AGP slot on the system board (see the following figure). 


Removing the AGP Board

Processor Subsystem Removal 

Remove the processor subsystem (CPU module and heatsink) from the system 

board as follows. 

1. Remove the system unit cover as previously described . 

2. Remove the chassis floor (see “Chassis Floor Removal”). 

! WARNING 




3. Locate the processor socket on the system board. 

! CAUTION 

Before picking up the processor, reduce static discharge by 

touching the metal frame of the system unit. 

4. With the system unit on its side, remove the heatsink support top bar from 

the support pins on the system board (see the following figure). 

5. Press in on the CPU locking tabs (see the following figure). 

6. Carefully slide the processor subsystem out of the retention mechanism. 

Releasing the Processor Subsystem 


5 1/4-Inch Device Removal 

Remove a 5 1/4-inch device from the system unit as follows. 


described. 

2. Label and unplug all signal and power cables from the 5 1/4-inch device to 

be removed. If the device is a CD-ROM drive and the system is equipped 

with audio, also unplug the audio cable from the CD-ROM drive. 

3. At the front of the chassis, press the locking tabs on either side of the device 

toward each other (see the following figure). This frees the tabs from the 

brackets on the chassis. 


Locating the Locking Tabs 

4. Slide the device out of the front of the system unit (see the following figure). 

Removing a 5 1/4-Inch Device

3 1/2-Inch Hard Drive Removal 

Remove the 3 1/2-inch hard drive as follows. 

1. Remove the system unit cover as previously described. 

2. Unplug the power and signal cables from the hard drive. 

Note: When reinstalling the drive, note that all power 

cables are keyed to fit only in the correct position. 

3. Remove the four screws holding the 3 1/2-inch hard drive. 

� If removing the inner hard drive, remove the screws holding the drive to 

the drive bracket (see the following figure). Use a long shaft Phillips 

head screwdriver to reach through the chassis cutouts to the screws in 

the bracket. 

Removing the Inner Hard Drive Screws 

� If removing an outer hard drive, remove the screws holding the drive to 

the chassis (see the following figure). 

4. Slide the drive out of its bracket and remove it from the system. 



Removing the Outer Hard Drive Screws 

3 1/2-Inch Diskette Drive Removal 

Remove the 3 1/2-inch diskette drive as follows. 


2. Remove the front panel as previously described. 

3. Label and unplug the signal and power cables from the back of the diskette 

drive. 

Note: When reinstalling the diskette drive, note that all 

power cables are keyed to fit only in the correct position. 

4. Remove the screws holding the diskette drive to the diskette drive bracket. 

Access the bracket through the cutout in the chassis wall. 

5. Remove the diskette drive from the chassis.

Power Supply Removal 

Remove the power supply as follows. 

! WARNING 





2. Unplug the power cables attached to the riser board. 

3. Unplug the power cables from all installed devices. 

4. Cut any tie wraps that may be securing the power cables to the system unit. 

5. Remove the four screws securing the power supply to the back of the system 

unit (see the following figure). 

6. Remove the power supply from the system unit. 

Removing the Power Supply Screws 


System Board Removal and Replacement 

Remove and replace the system board as follows. 

System Board Removal 

Remove the system board as follows. 

1. Ensure that all external cables are disconnected from the rear of the system. 

2. Remove the system unit floor and cover as previously described. 

3. Remove the chassis floor. 

4. Lift the insertion/extraction latch up slightly and pull it away from the 

system unit (see the following figure). The board releases and slides part 

way out of the system. 


Unlatching the System Board 

5. Carefully slide the board the rest of the way out of the chassis, taking care 

not to lift the board before it is free from its slot (see the following figure). 

Removing the System Board

6. If the system board is being replaced, remove the CPU and the DIMMs from 

the board and install them on the new board. 

System Board Replacement 

If you remove the system board from the computer, take care in replacing the 

board. Replacing the board requires the use of the chassis latch. Incorrect use of 

the chassis latch can damage it. 

Replace the system board as follows. 

! CAUTION 

Take care in replacing the system board in the computer. 

Incorrect use of the chassis latch can damage the latch. Use 

the following procedure to use the latch correctly. 

1. Make sure the chassis latch is in the open position. 

2. Insert the system board rails into the chassis rail guides. 

3. Slide the system board partway into the system unit along the chassis rail 

guide. Stop sliding the board when the outside edge of the system board 

aligns with the outside edge of the chassis (see the following figure). 

Correct Alignment of the System Board 



Incorrect Alignment of the System Board 

! CAUTION 

To prevent damage to the latch, align the system board with 

the outside edge of the chassis before closing the latch. 

4. Push the latch closed. This slides the board the rest of the way into the 

system unit and secures it into the riser board connector. 

! CAUTION 

If the board does not slide when you push the latch, slide the 

board out of the unit a bit and check the alignment position 

(see the previous figures). Push the latch closed. 

5. If the system board is aligned correctly, you might need to push the outside 

edges of the board to fully seat it into the riser board connector. 

6. Check the position of the chassis latch. The system board is secured when 

the latch is parallel with the outside edge of the board (see the following 

figure). 

7. Replace the graphics board in the AGP slot. Secure the board with the 

expansion slot screw. 

8. Replace the system unit floor and cover.

Plastic Rail Removal 

Secured Position of Latch 

Remove the plastic rails from the system board as follows. 


2. Remove the system board as previously described. 

3. Place the system board on a level static-free surface. 

4. Remove the four screws holding the two plastic rails to the underside of the 

system board (see the following figure). 

Removing the System Board Plastic Rail 

5. Lift the system board off the plastic rails. 


6. Lift the grounding clips off their notched seats on the plastic rail. 

Note: The grounding clips are keyed to fit correctly on 

the plastic rail. Make sure the clips are fully seated on the 

plastic rail before attaching the rails to a system board. 

Riser Board Removal 

Remove the riser board as follows. 


2. Remove the chassis floor as previously described. 

3. Label and unplug all cables on the riser board and on any expansion boards. 

4. Remove all expansion boards (see “Expansion Board Removal”). 

5. Remove the system board (see “System Board Removal”). 

6. Remove the three screws along the top edge of the riser board (see the 



Locating the Riser Board Screws 

7. Slide the riser board out of the slots on the wall of the chassis. 

8. Lift the riser board out of the system unit.

CMOS Battery Removal 

Remove the 3-volt lithium battery from the system board as follows. 

1. Turn off and unplug the system unit and any external options connected to 

the system. 

! CAUTION 

Removing the battery from the system board causes the 

computer to lose system configuration information. If 

possible, run Setup and record the system configuration 

settings before removing the battery. Use that information to 

restore the system after replacing the battery. 


3. Locate the battery and its socket on the system board (see the following 

figure). 

Locating the Battery 


4. Use your fingers to carefully remove the battery from the battery socket on 

the system board (see the following figure). 


Removing the Battery 

! WARNING 

The battery can explode if it is incorrectly replaced or 

improperly discarded. Use only the same battery or an 

equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer when 

replacing the battery. 

Lithium acts as a catalyst when exposed to water and 

causes spontaneous combustion on contact. Discard used 

batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 

5. With the positive (+) side facing up, press the new battery into the socket. 

6. Replace the system unit cover and floor as previously described. 

7. Connect external peripherals and power cables. 

8. Run Setup to reconfigure system parameters (see Section 2, “System 

Configuration”).

System Board 

� Connectors, Jumpers, and Sockets 

� Components 

� Pin Assignments 

� Resources 

4

4-2 System Board 

This section describes the locations of connectors, jumpers, and sockets on the 

system board, including external cable connectors, internal board connectors, 

jumper locations, and upgrade sockets. 

Included in this section are procedures for setting jumpers on the system board 

and a DIMM memory upgrade path for the DIMM sockets. Also included are 

descriptions of system board components, component pin assignments, system 

memory map, and I/O addresses. 

Connectors, Jumpers, and Sockets 

The following paragraphs describe the system board external cable connector 

locations, internal board connector locations, jumper locations, and upgrade 

sockets. Included are procedures for setting jumpers on the system board and a 

table showing the upgrade path for the DIMM sockets. 

External Cable Connectors 

Locations of the external cable connectors on the system board at the back of the 

system unit are shown in the following figure. For descriptions of the 

connectors, see Section 1, “System Overview.” 

System Board External Cable Connector Locations

Internal Connectors 

Locations of the internal connectors on the system board are shown in the 

following figure. Following the figure is a table that lists the connectors and the 

page where their pin assignments are defined. 

System Board Internal Connector Locations 

System Board Internal Connectors 

Connector Go to Page 

Parallel Interface Connector 4-20 

Serial Interface Connectors (COM1/COM2) 4-21 

Keyboard and Mouse Connectors 4-21 

Universal Serial Bus Connectors 4-22 

Microphone In Connector 4-23 

Line In Connector 4-23 

Line Out Connector 4-23 

System Board 4-3

System Board Jumpers 


The system board contains a single, three-pin configuration jumper block 

(J5G1). The jumper block is used with the BIOS Setup Maintenance menu for 

reconfiguring processor speed when upgrading the system processor. It is also 

used for resetting the password and for BIOS recovery. 

The following figure shows the location of jumper block J5G1 on the system 

board. To reset the jumper block, see the following paragraphs. (The factory-set 

jumper settings are included in Section 2, “System Configuration.”) 

Changing Processor Speed 

Locating Configuration Jumper Block J5G1 

To change processor speed, the system must be jumpered for Configure mode. 

In this mode, the system enters the Maintenance menu when it is restarted. 

Use the following steps to change processor speed. 

! CAUTION 

Jumpers are set correctly at the factory for the system 

configuration. Only change (or check) the appropriate 

jumper setting if upgrading the processor. 

Access the BIOS Setup utility and record any customized settings. See “BIOS 

Setup” in Section 2. 

! CAUTION 


to their factory defaults. Before jumpering for Configure 

mode, write down any customized BIOS settings for use 

after the procedure is completed.

1. Power off and unplug the system and any external options. 

! WARNING 

System power must be off before changing a jumper setting. 

2. Remove the system unit cover (see “Removing the System Unit Cover” in 

Section 3). 

3. Locate jumper block J5G1 on the system board. 

4. Use needle nose pliers to move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 (Normal mode) 

to pins 2 and 3 (Configure mode). This setting brings the system up in 

Configure mode when rebooted. 

5. Replace the system unit cover. Connect system power cables and external 

options. 

6. Power on the system. The Setup utility launches immediately after POST 

and displays the Maintenance menu. 

7. Select the Processor Speed field and press Enter. 

� A window appears displaying the supported processor speeds. Use the 

up or down arrow key to select the processor speed. 

� Press Enter. 

8. Select the Exit menu with the left or right arrow key. Press Enter to exit 

saving changes. Press Enter again to confirm that you want to exit the Setup 

utility. 

9. Power off and unplug the system and any external options. Remove the 

system unit cover. 

10. Move the jumper to pins 1 and 2 (Normal mode) so the system can restart in 

normal operation mode. 


options. 

12. Power on the system and press F2 to open the Setup utility before POST. 

Re-customize the BIOS settings. 

System Board 4-5

Clearing a Password 


If a password is forgotten or needs to be changed, use the following procedure 

to clear the current password and set a new one. 

! CAUTION 

Jumpers are set correctly at the factory for the system 

configuration. Only change (or check) the appropriate 

jumper setting if you forgot your password or want to change 

the password. 

Access the BIOS Setup utility and record any customized settings. See “BIOS 

Setup” in Section 2. 

! CAUTION 


to their factory defaults. Before jumpering the system for 

Configure mode, write down any customized BIOS settings. 

1. Power off and unplug the system and any peripherals. 

! WARNING 

The system power must be off before removing the cover 

and changing a jumper setting. 

2. Remove the system unit cover (see “Removing the System Unit Cover”). 


4. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 (Normal mode) to pins 2 and 3 

(Configure mode). This jumper setting brings the system up in Configure 

mode when rebooted. 


options. 

6. Power on the system. The BIOS Setup utility launches immediately after 

POST. No password is required. The Maintenance menu is active. 

7. Select the Clear All Passwords field. Press Enter. 

� A Setup Confirmation window appears with the prompt, “Clear All 

Passwords Now?” The default is Yes. Press the left or right arrow key to 

toggle between Yes and No. 

� Select Yes and press Enter to activate the choice.

BIOS Recovery 

8. Select the Exit menu with the left or right arrow key. Press Enter to exit 

saving changes. Press Enter again to confirm that you want to exit the Setup 

utility. 

9. Power off and unplug the system and any external options. Remove the 

system unit cover. 

10. Move the jumper to pins 1 and 2 (Normal mode) so the system can restart in 

normal operation mode. 


options. 

12. Power on the system and press F2 to open the Setup utility before POST. Set 

a new password and re-customize the BIOS settings (see Section 2). 

While rare, there may be a time when the system BIOS becomes corrupted. If it 

does, it’s usually because a BIOS update was interrupted. 

To perform a BIOS Recovery, use the following procedure in conjunction with a 

BIOS Recovery program. The program can be downloaded from the NEC CSD 

BBS, ftp site, or website. The BIOS Recovery program must be downloaded to a 

diskette, not to the hard drive. See Section 9 for downloading procedures. 

1. Power off and unplug the system and any peripherals. 

! WARNING 

The system power must be off before removing the cover 

and changing a jumper setting. 

2. Remove the system unit cover (see “Removing the System Unit Cover”). 


4. Remove the jumper from pins 1 and 2 (Normal mode) and store the jumper 

in a safe place. 


options. 

6. Insert the BIOS Recovery diskette in the diskette drive. 

7. Power up the system and follow the prompts until the recovery is completed. 

Remove the diskette. 

8. Unplug and remove system power cables and external options. 

9. Remove the system unit cover. 

10. Replace the jumper on pins 1 and 2 (Normal mode). 

System Board 4-7



options. 

12. Power on the system and press F2 to open the Setup utility before POST. Set 

the BIOS settings (see Section 2). 

Upgrade Sockets 

The system board has the following upgrade sockets: 

� processor socket 

� DIMM sockets. 

See the following paragraphs for socket descriptions. 

Processor Socket 

The processor socket is designed for easy processor upgradeability through use 

of a Single Edge Contact (S.E.C.) cartridge. The cartridge contains the 

processor, second level cache, thermal plate, and back cover. In addition, a 

heatsink is connected to the cartridge. 

DIMM Sockets 

The 242-pin edge connector socket (Slot 1) on the system board holds the 

processor S.E.C. cartridge. The cartridge is held in place in the socket by a 

retention mechanism. With the cartridge plugged into the socket, the processor’s 

pins automatically set the system board voltage regulator and processor speed 

(66 MHz or 100 MHz). 

To remove or install a processor S.E.C. cartridge, see Section 3, “Disassembly 

and Reassembly.” Pin assignments for the processor socket are included at the 

end of this section. 

The system board has three, 168-pin, gold-plated DIMM sockets (locations are 

shown on the figure at the beginning of this section). The sockets support up to 

384 MB of high-speed SDRAM memory. The sockets support DIMM modules 

in 16-, 32-, 64-, and 128-MB 66-MHz and 100-MHz memory configurations. 

The DIMM modules 

� can be installed in one, two, or three sockets 

� size can vary between sockets 

� speed must match the processor bus speed (66 MHz or 100 MHz) 

� can be single- and double-sided.

See the following tables for supported DIMMs and for sample DIMM upgrade 

paths. To determine the memory needed for a memory upgrade, see “Checking 

System Memory.” To remove or install a DIMM, see Section 3, “Disassembly 

and Reassembly.” Pin assignments for the DIMM sockets are included at the 


Supported DIMMs 

DIMM Size Non-ECC Configuration Ecc Configuration 

16 MB 2 Mbit x 64 2 Mbit x 72 



128 MB 16 Mbit x 64 16 Mbit x 72 

Sample DIMM Upgrade Paths* 

DIMM 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 3 Total Memory 

32 MB -- -- 32 MB 

16 MB 16 MB -- 32 MB 

16 MB 16 MB 16 MB 48 MB 

16 MB 16 MB 32 MB 64 MB 

16 MB 32 MB 32 MB 80 MB 

16 MB 16 MB 64 MB 96 MB 

32 MB 32 MB 32 MB 96 MB 

16 MB 32 MB 64 MB 112 MB 

64 MB 64 MB -- 128 MB 

16 MB 16 MB 128 MB 160 MB 

16 MB 32 MB 128 MB 166 MB 

16 MB 32 MB 128 MB 176 MB 

64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 192 MB 

32 MB 32 MB 128 MB 192 MB 

32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 224 MB 

64 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 

128 MB 128 MB -- 256 MB 

16 MB 128 MB 128 MB 272 MB 

32 MB 128 MB 128 MB 288 MB 

64 MB 128 MB 128 MB 320 MB 

128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 384 MB 

*The information in this table shows sample DIMM upgrade paths; it does not represent every 

combination of DIMMs supported in the system. 

System Board 4-9

Checking System Memory 

If you do not know how much memory is installed in the system, check the 

amount as follows. 


1. On the Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 desktop, point to My Computer 

and click the right mouse button. 

2. With the left mouse button, click Properties. The General tab shows the 

random access memory (RAM). This is the amount of system memory in the 

computer. 

In Windows 95, find the amount of memory by pointing to My Computer, 

clicking the right mouse button, and selecting Performance. 

Components 

Note: If a discrepancy is found in the amount of 

memory displayed at the Power-On Self-Test or in Windows 

with the amount of memory installed, check that the 

memory modules were installed correctly. 

The system board has the following features: 

� Intel 440BX chipset used for AGP, PCI/ISA, memory, and peripheral 

control 

� FDC37C777 Ultra I/O controller (integrates standard PC I/O functions: 

two serial ports, one EPP/ECP-capable parallel port, floppy disk 

interface, real time clock, keyboard and mouse controller; support for two 

USB ports and infrared port) 

� three dual in-line memory module (DIMM) sockets with support for up to 

384 MB of SDRAM using DIMMs 

� Phoenix Technologies Limited (PTL) BIOS in a flash memory device 

supporting system setup and PCI auto-configuration 

� 32-KB internal dual write-back cache integrated on the processor 

� pipelined 32-bit addressing 

� 64-bit data 

� 32 MB to 384 MB of SDRAM upgradeable with 16-MB, 32-MB, 

64-MB or 128-MB increments through DIMM sockets on system board 

(64-MB and 128-MB as available) 

� 512-KB write-back secondary cache memory on processor 

� System Setup utility built into the BIOS 

� 2-Mb Flash ROM for fast economical BIOS upgrades

� PCI local bus for fast data transfer 

� National Heceta LM79 chip for monitoring voltage, temperature, and 

security (NEC MagicEye technology) 

� integrated sound (Crystal audio system) 

� power management with power saving mode, featuring inactivity timer 

� external connectors for connecting the following external devices: 

⎯ VGA-compatible monitor (standard, super, high-resolution VGA) to 

AGP port on system board 

⎯ Personal system/2 (PS/2 ® )-style mouse 

⎯ PS/2-style keyboard 

⎯ Bi-directional Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) and Enhanced 

Capabilities Port (ECP) support for a parallel printer 

⎯ Serial devices through two buffered 16C550 UART serial ports, 

supporting up to 115.2 KB per second 

⎯ Two USB devices 

⎯ Speaker and microphone connectors (line in, line out, microphone 

in). 

The following table lists the major components on the system board. 

Component Function 

Pentium II Processor (mounted in a 

S.E.C. cartridge) 

Intel 440BX Chipset: 

System Board Components 

266-MHz Pentium II processor 





82443BX PCI/AGP controller (PAC) Provides bus control signals, address paths, and data paths for 

transfers between the processor’s host bus, PCI bus, AGP 

connector, and system memory. The PAC comes in a 492-pin 

BGA package on the system board. 

Features include processor interface control (32-bit addressing, 

66-MHz and 100-MHz host bus speed), an integrated DRAM 

controller (synchronous DRAM, 64/72-bit path-to-memory, auto 

detection of memory type) and an AGP interface (compliant with 

AGP specification with data transfer rates up to 133 MHz), fully 

synchronous minimum latency PCI bus interface (compliant with 

PCI specification with PCI-to-DRAM access greater than 100 MB 

per second). 

System Board 4-11

Component Function 

82371EB PCI ISA IDE Xcelerator 

(PIIX4E) 


System Board Components 

Functions as a PCI to ISA bridge; PCI IDE functionality; a USB 

controller; integrated dual channel enhanced IDE interface with 

support for Ultra DMA/33; enhanced DMA controller; interrupt 

controller based on 82C59, with support for 15 interrupts; power 

management logic (sleep/resume and remote wake on LAN); 

real-time clock with 256-byte, battery-backed CMOS static RAM 

(SRAM); 16-bit counters based on 82C54. 

82558 LAN controller The Intel 82558 LAN controller provides an Ethernet LAN 

interface for both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX connectivity. The 

controller features: 

CSMA/CD protocol engine 

PCI compatibility 

DMA engine for movement of command, status, and network 

data across the PCI bus 

Standard MII interface for access to IEEE 802.3 compliant 

physical layer interface. 

Alert On LAN Component The Alert On LAN Component is a companion device to the Intel 

82558 LAN controller. Both devices work together to provide a 

management interface between a remote management console 

and a client system monitoring instrumentation. When an alert 

occurs (a chassis intrusion, for example), the LAN component 

transmits Ethernet packets to the 82558 LAN controller. 

National Heceta LM80 Provides voltage, temperature, and security monitoring (NEC 

MagicEye technology). 

SMC FDC37C777 Super I/O 

controller 

The controller provides the following features: 

Multimode parallel port 

Centronics compatible (standard mode) 

Enhanced capabilities port (ECP) 

Enhanced parallel port (EPP) 

Two RS-232C serial ports 

Integrated 8042A keyboard controller 

Supports industry-standard floppy controller 

Crystal Semiconductor CS4235 Provides audio on system board. 

Processor and Secondary Cache 

The system uses an Intel Pentium II processor with an internal clock speed of 

266 MHz, 300 MHz, 333 MHz, 350 MHz, or 400 MHz. 

The processor is an advanced pipelined 32-bit addressing, 64-bit data processor 

designed to optimize multitasking operating systems. The 64-bit registers and 

data paths support 64-bit addresses and data types. 

To use the Pentium processor’s power, the system features an optimized 64-bit 

memory interface and 512 KB of secondary write-back cache on the processor. 

The processor is compatible with 8-, 16-, and 32-bit software written for the 

Intel386, Intel486, Pentium, and Pentium Pro processors. The Pentium II 

processor is mounted in S.E.C. cartridge with an attaching heatsink that installs 

as a unit in Slot 1 on the system board.

System BIOS 

The ISA- and PCI-compatible BIOS is contained in a flash memory device on 

the system board. The BIOS provides the Power-On Self-Test (POST), the 

system Setup program, a PCI and IDE auto-configuration utility, and BIOS 

recovery code. 

The system BIOS is always shadowed. Shadowing allows any BIOS routine to 

be executed from fast 32-bit DRAM on the system board, instead of from the 

slower 8-bit flash device. 

NEC’s Flash ROM allows fast, economical BIOS upgrades. The Flash ROM is a 

reprogrammable EPROM containing both the system and video BIOS. Using 

the Flash ROM to change the ROM BIOS provides the following advantages: 

� the BIOS upgrade is performed quickly and easily 

� the expense of replacing ROM BIOS chips is eliminated, so system 

maintenance costs are reduced 

� there is less chance of inadvertently damaging the system board than 

when physically replacing ROMs 

� new technology can be incorporated while maintaining corporate 

standards 

� network administrators can exercise company-wide control of BIOS 

revisions. 

The BIOS programs execute the Power-On Self-Test, initialize processor 

controllers, and interact with the display, diskette drive, hard drives, 

communication devices, and peripherals. The system BIOS also contains the 

Setup utility. The POST copies the ROM BIOS into RAM (shadowing) for 

maximum performance. 

The Flash ROM allows the system and video BIOS to be upgraded with the 

BIOS Update utility, without having to physically remove the ROM (see 

Section 2 for further information on the BIOS Update utility). The Flash ROM 

supports the reprogramming of the system BIOS and the video BIOS. 

System Memory 

The system comes with between 32 MB and 384 MB of SDRAM installed in 

DIMM sockets on the system board. 

The memory configuration consists of three sockets. The DIMM sockets accept 

168-pin, 64-bit (non-ECC) or 72-bit (ECC) 16-, 32-, 64-, and 128-MB DIMMs 

(64-MB and 128-MB as available). See “DIMM Sockets” for a list of supported 

DIMMs. 

System Board 4-13

Hardware Monitor 

Plug and Play 

NLX Design 

ISA Bus 

The National Semiconductor Heceta LM80 chip provides economical 

instrumentation capabilities for reduced cost of PC ownership when the system 

is used with the LANDesk ® Client Manager. This single-chip applicationspecific 

integrated circuit (ASIC) features: 


� integrated ambient temperature sensor 

� power supply voltage monitoring to detect excessively high or low 

voltage levels 

� registers for storing POST hardware test results and error codes 

� remote reset capabilities from a remote peer or server through LANDesk 

Client Manager v.3.2. 

When ranges for temperature or voltage are exceeded, an interrupt is activated. 

The hardware monitor component connects to the ISA bus as an 8-bit I/O 

mapped device. 

The system comes with a Plug and Play BIOS in support of Plug and Play 

technology. Plug and Play simplifies setup procedures for installing Plug and 

Play expansion boards. With Plug and Play, adding a Plug and Play expansion 

board is done by turning off the system, installing the board, and turning on the 

system. There are no jumpers to set and no system resource conflicts to resolve. 

Plug and Play automatically configures the board. (Some Plug and Play devices 

may need to be jumpered if used in a system running the Windows NT ® 

operating system.) 

The system is designed to conform to the NLX standard. Electrical and 

mechanical interfaces and board dimensions are standardized. 

� Signal and power connections to the system board are carried through the 

riser board. 

� The system board is free of internal cabling. 

� A chassis latch releases and secures the system board for easy removal 

and replacement. 

The system board uses the ISA bus for transferring data between the processor 

and some I/O peripherals and expansion boards. The ISA bus supports 16-bit 

data transfers and typically operates at 8 MHz.

PCI Local Bus 

PCI/IDE Ports 

The 32-bit PCI local bus is the primary I/O bus for the system. The PCI bus is a 

highly integrated I/O interface that offers the highest performance local bus 

available for the Pentium processor. The bus supports burst modes that send 

large amounts of data across the bus, allowing fast displays of high-resolution 

images. 

The PCI local bus is a high-performance bus that provides a processorindependent 

data path between the CPU and high-speed peripherals. The PCI 

bus is a robust interconnect mechanism designed specifically to accommodate 

multiple high performance peripherals for graphics, full motion video, SCSI, 

and LAN. 

The PCI local bus supports memory transfer rates of over 100 MB per second 

for reads and over 120 MB per second for writes, depending on processor 

configuration. 

The system board supports two high-performance PCI/IDE ports: a primary port 

and a secondary port (the port connectors are located on the riser board which 

plugs into the system board). Each port supports up to two devices for a total of 

four IDE devices. The primary PCI/IDE port has an enhanced IDE interface that 

supports PIO Mode 4 devices with 16 MB per second 32-bit wide data transfers 

on the high-performance PCI local bus. Each port supports Ultra DMA/33. 

The installed hard drive is connected to the primary PCI/IDE connector with a 

three-connector cable. If a CD-ROM drive is included in the system, it is 

connected to the secondary PCI/IDE port with a three-connector cable. A second 

device can be added to the primary PCI/IDE port. 

Parallel Interface 

The system has a 25-pin bidirectional parallel port on the system board. Port 

specifications conform to the IBM-PC standards. The port supports Enhanced 

Capabilities Port (ECP) and Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) modes for devices 

that require ECP or EPP protocols. The protocols allow high-speed bidirectional 

transfer over a parallel port and increase parallel port functionality 

by supporting more devices. 

The BIOS has automatic ISA printer port sensing that works with most devices. 

If the BIOS detects an ISA printer port mapped to the same address, the built-in 

printer port is disabled. (Verify in the BIOS Setup that printer ports mapped to 

the same address are enabled or disabled appropriately.) The BIOS also sets the 

first parallel interface port it finds as LPT1 and the second port it finds as LPT2. 

The interrupt is set at IRQ7 via the BIOS Setup utility. Software-selectable base 

addresses are 228h, 378h, and 278h. 

System Board 4-15

Serial Interface 

Sets of I/O addresses for the parallel port are given in the following table (see 

Section 2, “System Configuration,” for interrupt levels). This is a list of all 

possible configurations; the parallel port uses only one set. 


Starting I/O Address Port 

Parallel Port Addresses 

378 LPT1 

278 LPT2 

228 LPT3 

378 LPT1 

278 LPT2 

228 LPT3 

Parallel interface signals are output through the system board’s 25-pin, 

D-subconnector. The connector is located at the back of the system unit. Pin 

assignments for the parallel interface connector are included at the end of this 

section. 

The system has two 16C550 UART compatible serial ports (COM1 and COM2) 

integrated on the I/O controller. The serial ports support the standard RS-232C 

interface. The buffered high-speed serial ports support transfer rates up to 

115.2 KB. These ports allow the installation of high-speed serial devices for 

faster data transfer rates. 

Sets of I/O addresses for the two channels are given in the following table (see 

Section 2, “System Configuration,” for interrupt levels). Soft-selectable base 

addresses are 3F8h, 2F8h, 3E8h, and 2E8h. 

Serial Port 1 and Serial Port 2 I/O Addresses 

Starting I/O Address Port 

3F8 COM1 

2F8 COM2 

3E8 COM3 

2E8 COM4 

3F8 COM1 

2F8 COM2 

3E8 COM3 

2E8 COM4

USB Interface 

See Section 2, “System Configuration,” for information on resetting the port 

through the BIOS Setup utility. See Section 10, “Specifications,” for the serial 

interface specifications. 

Serial interface signals are output through the system board’s 9-pin, 

D-subconnectors. The connectors are located at the back of the system unit. Pin 

assignments for the serial interface connector are included at the end of this 

section.. 

The Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports allow new Plug and Play serial devices to 

be added without having to open the system. One USB device may be plugged 

into each USB port for direct system connection. With a hub and the proper 

cabling, up to 127 USB devices can be addressed by the system. The USB 

determines system resources for each peripheral and assigns them without user 

intervention. Boot support for a USB keyboard is present so the system can be 

booted with a USB keyboard instead of a standard keyboard. 

Infrared Interface 

The I/O controller incorporates an infrared interface that provides two-way 

wireless communication through the IrDA window (port) on the front of the 

system. The interface uses infrared as the transmission medium instead of a 

traditional serial cable. 

The IrDA port permits the transfer of files to or from portable devices such as 

laptops and personal digital assistant (PDA) products using the LapLink ® 

applications software or other software supporting IrDA data transfer. The port 

supports transfers at 115.2 Kbps from a distance of 1 meter (3 feet 3 inches). 

The IrDA port uses the system’s COM2 serial port to transfer data. The port 

shares registers and function logic with COM2. Note that COM2 is disabled by 

default, so it must be enabled before the IrDA port can be used. Enable COM2 

from the Advanced menu of the BIOS Setup utility, under the Serial Port B 

submenu, and set Serial Port B Mode to IrDA. 

Graphics Capabilities 

The system supports AGP boards and PCI graphics boards. A PCI graphics 

board installs in one of the computer’s PCI expansion slots. An AGP board 

installs in the system board’s AGP slot. 

The following graphics boards are available from NEC CSD: 

� ATI XPERT@Work (RagePRO) 4-MB AGP board 

This board contains 4 MB of SGRAM. 

� ATI XPERT@Work (RagePRO) 4-MB AGP board with 4-MB upgrade 

This board contains 8 MB of SGRAM. 

System Board 4-17


� AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II (3D Labs PerMedia-2A) graphics board 

This board contains 8 MB of video memory. 

To view photorealistic images, enhance presentation graphics, and view 

TV-quality MPEG video, connect a standard VGA-compatible monitor to the 

PCI graphics board or the AGP board external VGA monitor connector. 

Accelerated Graphics Port 

The system board contains a 132-pin accelerated graphics port (AGP) slot on the 

system board that supports graphics-intensive, 3D applications. The AGP 

operates independently of the PCI bus and supports 133-MHz data transfer rates, 

allowing 500 MB of data to be transmitted per second. 

The AGP is Plug and Play compatible and supports the ATI XPERT@Work 

AGP and PerMedia-2A graphics board available from NEC CSD. 

With the graphics board installed in the AGP slot, attach the display monitor to 

the board’s VGA-compatible connector on the rear panel. 

Graphics Controller 

The graphics controller is specifically designed for graphics-intensive 

operations, including 3D and 2D effects, texture mapping, text and color pixel 

amplification, and video acceleration. The controller minimizes bus traffic by 

off-loading the tasks normally performed by the processor, providing 64-bit, 

high resolution performance for demanding True Color displays and other 

sophisticated graphics functions. 

Motion Video Controller 

The motion video controller integrates a Windows graphical user interface 

(GUI) engine and motion video playback hardware. 

Support includes: 

� MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 

� Video for Windows 

� Active Movie (Windows 95 only). 

MPEG is a compression/decompression standard developed by a professional 

video group called the Motion Picture Experts Group. MPEG produces fullscreen, 

30-frames-per-second (fps), broadcast-quality digital video. 

Graphics Support 

Depending on the graphics board, the system supports the following resolutions, 

colors, and refresh rates for systems with 4 MB or 8 MB of video memory (see 

the following tables).

Screen 

Resolution 

ATI XPERT@Work 2D Display Modes and Refresh Rates 

8-Bit Color 

(256 colors) 

Refresh Rate (Hz) 

15-/16-Bit Color 

(32K/64K colors) 

24-Bit Color 

(16.7 M colors) 

4 MB 8 MB 4 MB 8 MB 4MB 8 MB 

640 x 480 200 200 200 200 200 200 

800 x 600 200 200 200 200 200 200 

1024 x 768 150 150 150 150 150 150 

1152 x 864 120 120 120 120 120 120 

1280 x 1024 100 100 100 100 100 100 

1600 x 1200 85 85 85 85 -- 75 

K = Thousand 

M = Millions 

Frame 

Buffer Screen Resolution 

ATI XPERT@Work 3D Display Modes 

Color Depth 

(bits/pixel) 

Front Buffer 

(MB) 

Back Buffer 

(MB) 

Z Buffer 

(MB) 

4 640 x 480 16 0.59 0.59 0.59 

4 640 x 480 32 1.17 1.17 0.59 

4 640 x 480 16 0.92 0.92 0.92 

8 1024 x 768 32 3.00 3.00 1.50 

8 1280 x 1024 16 2.50 2.50 2.50 

Integrated Audio 

To support the increasing number of multimedia applications, a Crystal 

Semiconductor CS4235 chip is integrated on the system board. The chip 

provides 16-bit stereo, Sound Blaster Pro ® -compatible audio. 

The sound system provides all the digital and analog mixing functions required 

for playing and recording audio on personal computers. Features include stereo 

analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converters, analog mixing, anti-aliasing 

and reconstruction filters, line and microphone level inputs, digital audio 

compression, and full digital control of all mixer and volume control functions. 

The sound system is standard and has the following features: 

� Crystal CS4235 chip integrated on system board 

� digital audio and analog mixing functions, including stereo analog-todigital 

and digital-to-analog converters, analog mixing, anti-aliasing and 

reconstruction filters, line and microphone level inputs, digital audio 

compression, and full digital control of mixer and volume control 

functions 

System Board 4-19


� Adlib, Sound Blaster Pro 2.0, Windows Sound System ® , and MPU-401 

compatibility. 

The Crystal audio chip includes a full Plug and Play interface. Each logical 

device is configured into the host environment using the Plug and Play 

configuration methodologies. The audio subsystem requires two DMA channels 

and one interrupt. 

Pin Assignments 

The following paragraphs list the pin assignments for the various connectors on 

the system board. 

Parallel Interface Connector 

The following table lists the pin assignments for the parallel interface connector 

on the system board. 

Parallel Interface Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name 

1 Strobe 14 Auto Feed 

2 Data Bit 0 15 Fault 

3 Data Bit 1 16 INIT 

4 Data Bit 2 17 SLCT IN 

5 Data Bit 3 18 Ground 





10 ACK 23 Ground 

11 BUSY 24 Ground 

12 ERROR 25 Ground 

13 SLCT -- --

Serial Interface Connectors 

The following table lists the pin assignments for the serial interface connectors. 

Pin Signal Name 

1 DCD 

2 Serial In 

3 Serial Out 

4 DTR 

5 GND 

6 DSR 

7 RTS 

8 CTS 

9 RI 

Keyboard and Mouse Connectors 

Serial Interface Pin Assignments 

The keyboard and mouse are PS/2-style connectors and can be plugged into 

either connector on the system board. The system unit detects their presence at 

power on. Pin assignments are given in the following table. 

Keyboard and Mouse Pin Assignments 


1 Data 

2 No connection 

3 Ground 

4 +5 V (fused) 

5 Clock 

6 No connection 

System Board 4-21

Universal Serial Bus Connectors 

The pin assignments for the universal serial bus (USB) connectors are provided 

in the following table. 


Universal Serial Bus Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 +5V (cable power) 

2 - Data 

3 + Data 

4 Ground (cable ground) 

VGA Interface Connector 

Video signals are output from the AGP or PCI video board through a VGA 

interface connector, which is a 15-pin, D-subconnector (VESA VS890803-2) 

located at the rear of the system unit. The following table lists the pin 

assignments. 

VGA Interface Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 Red 

2 Green 

3 Blue 

4 Not used 

5 Red return (ground) 

6 Green return (ground) 

7 Blue return (ground) 

8 Ground 

9 5V (fused) 

10 Logic ground 

11 Not used 

12 DDC DAT 

13 Horizontal sync 

14 Vertical sync 

15 DDC CLK 

16 Logic ground* 

17 Logic ground* 

* Pins 16 and 17 are connector mounting holes connected to logic ground.

Microphone In Connector 

The pin assignments for the microphone in connector (J8P2) are provided in the 

following table. 

Line In Connector 

Microphone In Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 Ground 

2 Mic-In 

3 Vic Voltage Ref. 

The pin assignments for the microphone in connector (J9P1) are provided in the 


Line In Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 Ground 

2 Line-In Left 

3 Line-In Right 

Line Out Connector 

The pin assignments for the line out connector (J8P1) are provided in the 


Line Out Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 Ground 

2 Line Out Left 

3 Line Out Right 

System Board 4-23

DIMM Sockets 


The following table lists the pin assignments for system board DIMM sockets. 

DIMM Socket Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 

1 VSS 57 DQ18 113 DQM5 

2 DQ0 58 DQ19 114 NC 

3 DQ1 59 VDD 115 RAS 

4 DQ2 60 DQ20 116 VSS 

5 DQ3 61 NC 117 A1 

6 VDD 62 NC (VREF) 118 A3 

7 DQ4 63 CKE1 119 A5 

8 DQ5 64 VSS 120 A7 

9 DQ6 65 DQ21 121 A9 

10 DQ7 66 DQ22 122 BA0 

11 DQ8 67 DQ23 123 NC (A11) 

12 VSS 68 VSS 124 VDD 

13 DQ9 69 DQ24 125 CK1 

14 DQ10 70 DQ25 126 NC (A12) 

15 DQ11 71 DQ26 127 VSS 

16 DQ12 72 DQ27 128 CKE0 

17 DQ13 73 VDD 129 NC 

18 VDD 74 DQ28 130 DQM6 

19 DQ14 75 DQ29 131 DQM7 

20 DQ15 76 DQ30 132 NC (A13) 

21 CB0 77 DQ31 133 VDD 

22 CB1 78 VSS 134 NC 

23 VSS 79 CK2 135 NC 

24 NC 80 NC 136 DB6 

25 NC 81 NC 137 CB7 

26 VDD 82 SDA 138 VSS 

27 WE 83 SCL 139 DQ48 

28 DQm0 84 VDD 140 DQ49 

29 DQM1 85 VSS 141 DQ50 

30 S0 86 DQ32 142 DQ51 

31 NC 87 DQ33 143 VDD

DIMM Socket Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 

32 VSS 88 DQ34 144 DQ52 

33 A0 89 DQ35 145 NC 

34 A2 90 VDD 146 NC (VREF) 

35 A4 91 DQ36 147 NC 

36 A6 92 DQ37 148 VSS 

37 A8 93 DQ38 149 DQ53 

38 A10 94 DQ39 150 DQ54 

39 NC (BA1) 95 DQ40 151 DQ55 

40 VDD 96 VSS 152 VSS 

41 VDD 97 DQ41 153 DQ56 

42 CK0 98 DQ42 154 DQ57 

43 VSS 99 DQ43 155 DQ58 

44 NC 100 DQ44 156 DQ59 

45 S2 101 DQ45 157 VDD 

46 DQM2 102 VDD 158 DQ60 

47 DQM3 103 DQ46 159 DQ61 

48 NC 104 DQ47 160 DQ62 

49 VDD 105 CB4 161 DQ63 

50 NC 106 CB5 162 VSS 

51 NC 107 VSS 163 DK3 

52 CB2 108 NC 164 NC 

53 CB3 109 NC 165 SA0 

54 VSS 110 VDD 166 SA1 

55 DQ16 111 CAS 167 SA2 

56 DQ17 112 DQM4 168 VDD 

Resources 

Memory Map 

The system memory map, I/O addresses, and DMA settings are given in the 

following sections. System interrupt settings, parallel interrupt settings, and 

serial interrupt settings are included in Section 2, “System Configuration.” 

The system memory map is shown in the following table. 

System Board 4-25

Memory Space Size Function 


System Memory Map 

100000-18000000 383 MB Extended memory 

FC000-FFFFF 16 KB Boot block 

FA000-FBFFF 8 KB ESCD (Plug and Play Configuration and DMI) 

F9000-F9FFF 4 KB Reserved for BIOS 

F8000-F8FFF 4 KB OEM logo or Scan User Flash) 

E8000-E7FFF 64 KB POST BIOS 

E0000-E7FFF 32 KB POST BIOS (currently available as UMB) 

C8000-D7FFF 96 KB Available HI DOS memory (open to ISA and PCI bus) 

A0000-C7FFF 160 KB Video memory and BIOS 

9FC00-9FFFF 1 KB Extended BIOS data (movable by memory manager software) 

80000-9FBFF 127 KB Extended conventional memory 

00000-7FFFF 512 KB Conventional memory 

I/O Addresses 

The processor communicates with I/O devices by I/O mapping. The 

hexadecimal (hex) addresses of I/O devices are listed in the following table. 

Note: In Plug and Play systems, these addresses are 

typical but may vary by configuration. 

I/O Address Map 

Address (Hex) I/O Device Name 

0000-000F PIIX4 - DMA controller 1 (channel 0-3) 

0020-0021 PIIX4 - interrupt controller 1 

002E-002F Super I/O controller configuration registers 

0040-0043 PIIX4 - counter/timer 1 

0048-004B PIIX4 - counter/timer 2 

0060 Keyboard controller byte - reset IRQ 

0061 PIIX4 - NMI, speaker control 

0064 Keyboard controller, command/status byte 

0070, bit 7 PIIX4 - enable NMI 

0070, bits 6 through 0 PIIX4 - real time clock, address 

0071 PIIX4 - real time clock, data 

0078-0079 Reserved - board configuration



0080-008F PIIX4 - DMA page registers 

00A0-00A1 PIIX4 - interrupt controller 2 

00B2-00B3 APM control 

00C0-00DE PIIX4 - DMA controller 2 

00F0 Reset numeric error (numeric data processor) 

0170-0177 Secondary IDE channel 

01F0-01F7 Primary IDE channel 

0200-0207 Audio/game port 

0220-022F Audio (Sound Blaster compatible) 

0240-024F Audio (Sound Blaster compatible)/alternate 

0278-027F Parallel port 2 

0290-0297 Hardware monitor 

02E8-02EF COM4/video (8514A) 

02F8-02FF COM2 

0300-0301 MPU-401 (MIDI)/alternate 




0376 Secondary IDE channel command port 

0377 Floppy channel 2 command 

0377, bit 7 Floppy disk change, channel 2 

0377, bits 6 through 0 Secondary IDE channel status port 

0378-037F Parallel port 1 

0388-038D AdLIB (FM synthesizer) 

03B4-03B5 Video (VGA) 

03BA Video (VGA) 

03BC-03BF Parallel port 3 

03C0-03CA Video (VGA) 

03CC Video (VGA) 

03CE-03CF Video (VGA) 

03D4-03D5 Video (VGA) 

03DA Video (VGA) 

03E8-03EF COM3 

03F0-03F5 Floppy channel 1 

System Board 4-27

DMA Settings 




03F6 Primary IDE channel command port 

03F7 (write) Floppy channel 1 command 

03F7, bit 7 Floppy disk change channel 1 

03F7, bit 6 through 0 Primary IDE channel status port 

03F8-03FF COM1 

04D0-04D1 Edge/level triggered PIC 

0530-0537 Windows Sound System 

0604-060B Windows Sound System 

LPTn + 400h ECP port, LPT n base address + 400h 

0CF8-0CFB* PCI configuration address register 

0CF9** Turbo and reset control register 

0CFC-0CFF PCI configuration data register 

0E80-0E87 Windows sound system 

0F40-0F47 Windows sound system 

0F86-0F87 Crystal Audio configuration 

FF00-FF07 IDE bus master register 

FFA0-FFA7 Primary bus master registers 

FFA8-FFAF Secondary bus master registers 

* Only accessible by DWORD accesses. 

** Byte access only. 

The system’s DMA settings are given in the following table. 

DMA Setting Device 

0 Audio 

DMA Settings 

1 Audio/parallel port 

2 Diskette drive 

3 Parallel port (for ECP or EPP)/audio 

4 Reserved —– cascade channel 

5 Available

DMA Setting Device 

6 Available 

7 Available 

DMA Settings 

* In Plug and Play systems, these settings are typical but may vary by configuration. 

System Board 4-29

Riser Board 

� Subsystem Cable Connectors 

� IDE and Diskette Drive Cable Connectors 

� PCI and ISA Cable Connectors 

� Power Supply Connectors 

� Jumper Settings 

5

5-2 Riser Board 

This section shows the following riser board connector locations, connector pin 

assignments, jumper locations, and jumper settings: 

� subsystem cable connectors 

⎯ CD audio in connector 

⎯ modem in connector 

⎯ Wake-On LAN connector 

⎯ chassis intrusion connector 

⎯ front panel IrDA connector 

⎯ speaker connector 

⎯ fan connector 

⎯ NLX connector 

⎯ LAN connector 

� IDE and diskette drive cable connectors 

⎯ IDE cable connectors 

⎯ diskette drive cable connector 

� PCI and ISA cable connectors 

⎯ PCI cable connectors 

⎯ ISA cable connectors 

� power supply connectors 

⎯ main power 

⎯ optional power 

� jumper settings 

⎯ LAN jumper settings 

⎯ fan jumper settings.

Subsystem Cable Connectors 

The subsystem cable connector locations are shown in the following figure. Pin 

assignments are given in the tables following the figure. 

CD Audio In Connector 

Subsystem Cable Connector Locations 

The pin assignments for CD audio in connector JP6 on the riser board are as 

follows. 

CD Audio In Connector JP6 Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 Left channel 

2 Ground 

3 Ground 

4 Right channel 

Modem In Connector 

The pin assignments for modem in connector JP1 are as follows. 

Modem In Connector JP1 Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 


2 Modem MIC out 


4 Modem speaker in 

Riser Board 5-3

Wake-On LAN Connector 


The pin assignments for Wake-On LAN connector J5 are as follows. 

Wake-On LAN Connector J5 Pin Assignments 


1 5VSB 

2 GND 

3 Modem Wake 

4 GND 

5 LAN Wake 

Chassis Intrusion Detection Connector 

The pin assignments for chassis intrusion detection connector J6 are as follows. 

Chassis Intrusion Detection Connector J6 Pin Assignments 


1 Intrusion - 

2 Ground 

Front Panel/IrDA Connector 

The pin assignments for front panel/IrDA connector J4 are as follows. 

Front Panel/IrDA Connector J4 Pin Assignments 


1 Activity LED - 

2 +5V 

3 On/Off switch 

4 +5V 

5 PWR-/Sleep LED select 

6 Ground 

7 Reset switch - 

8 Ground 

9 Sleep switch + 

10 Power LED - 

11 IR RX

Fan Connector 

LAN Connector 

Front Panel/IrDA Connector J4 Pin Assignments 


12 Key 

13 IR TX 

14 IR SELO 

15 IR MODE SEL 

16 IR SEL1 

The pin assignments for fan connector J9 are as follows. 


1 +12V (fused) 

2 Ground 

3 +12V (fused) 

Fan Connector J9 Pin Assignments 

The pin assignments for LAN connector RJ-45 are as follows. 

LAN Connector RJ-45 Pin Assignments 


1 TX - 

2 TX - 

3 RX - 

4 No Connect 

5 No Connect 

6 RX - 

7 No Connect 

8 No Connect 

Riser Board 5-5

IDE and Diskette Drive Cable Connectors 


The IDE and diskette cable connectors are shown in the following figure. Pin 


IDE Connectors 

IDE and Diskette Drive Cable Connectors 

The pin assignments for the primary and secondary IDE connectors are listed in 

the following table. The signals in parentheses are for the secondary connector. 

IDE Interface Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Assignment 

1 Reset IDE 2 Ground 

3 Host Data 7 4 Host Data 8 








19 Ground 20 Key 

21 DRQ0 (DRQ1) 22 Ground 

23 I/O Write- 24 Ground

IDE Interface Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Assignment 

25 I/O Read- 26 Ground 

27 IOCHRDY 28 IDE_CSEL 

29 DDACKO (DDACK1) 30 Ground 

31 IRQ14 (IRQ15) 32 No Connection 

33 Addr 1 34 No Connection 

35 Addr 0 36 Addr 2 

37 Chip Select 0- 38 Chip Select 3P (3S) 

39 Activity- 40 Ground 

Diskette Drive Connector 

The pin assignments for the diskette drive connector are given in the following 

table. 

Diskette Drive Pin Assignments 


1 Ground 2 DENSEL 

3 Ground 4 Reserved 

5 Key 6 DRATE0- 

7 Ground 8 Index- 

9 Ground 10 Motor Enable A- 

11 Ground 12 Drive Select B- 

13 Ground 14 Drive Select A- 

15 Ground 16 Motor Enable B- 

17 MSEN1 18 DIR- 

19 Ground 20 STEP- 

21 Ground 22 Write Data- 

23 Ground 24 Write Gate- 

25 Ground 26 Track 00- 

27 MSEN0 28 Write Protect- 

29 Ground 30 Read Data- 

31 Ground 32 HDSEL- 

33 Ground 34 DSKCHG- 

Riser Board 5-7

PCI and ISA Cable Connectors 


The PCI and ISA cable connectors are shown in the following figure. Pin 


PCI Connectors 

PCI and ISA Cable Connector Locations 

The pin assignments for the 124-pin PCI connectors are given in the following 

table. 

PCI Bus Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 

A1 GND B1 -12V A32 AD16 B32 AD17 

A2 +12V B2 No Connect A33 3.3V B33 CBE2- 

A3 No Connect B3 GND A34 FRAME- B34 GND 

A4 No Connect B4 No Connect A35 GND B35 IRDY- 

A5 Vcc B5 Vcc A36 TRDY- B36 3.3V 

A6 PCIINT3- B6 Vcc A37 GND B37 DEVSEL- 

A7 PCIINT1- B7 PCIINT2- A38 STOP- B38 GND 

A8 Vcc B8 PCIINT4- A39 3.3V B39 PLOCK- 

A9 Reserved B9 No Connect A40 SDONE B40 PERR- 

A10 Vcc B10 Reserved A41 SBO- B41 3.3V 

A11 Reserved B11 No Connect A42 GND B42 SERR- 

A12 GND B12 GND A43 PAR B43 3.3V 

A13 GND B13 GND A44 AD15 B44 CBE1- 

A14 Reserved B14 Reserved A45 3.3V B45 AD14

PCI Bus Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 

A15 SPCIRST- B15 GND A46 AD13 B46 GND 

A16 Vcc B16 PCLKE A47 AD11 B47 AD12 

A17 AGNT- B17 GND A48 GND B48 AD10 

A18 GND B18 REQA- A49 AD9 B49 GND 

A19 Reserved B19 Vcc A50 KEY B50 Key 

A20 AD30 B20 AD31 A51 KEY B51 KEY 

A21 3.3V B21 AD29 A52 CBEO- B52 AD8 

A22 AD28 B22 GND A53 3.3V B53 AD7 

A23 AD26 B23 AD27 A54 AD6 B54 3.3V 

A24 GND B24 AD25 A55 AD4 B55 AD5 

A25 AD24 B25 3.3V A56 GND B56 AD3 

A26 AD22 (IDSEL) B26 CBE3- A57 AD2 B57 GND 

A27 3.3V B27 AD23 A58 AD0 B58 AD1 

A28 AD22 B28 GND A59 Vcc B59 Vcc 

A29 AD20 B29 AD21 A60 SREQ64- B60 SACK64- 

A30 GND B30 AD19 A61 Vcc B61 Vcc 

A31 AD18 B31 3.3V A62 Vcc B62 Vcc 

ISA Bus Connector 

The pin assignments for the ISA bus connector are given in the following table. 

ISA Bus Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin 

B1 GND A1 IOCHK- B26 DACK2- A26 SA5 

B2 RSTDRV A2 SD7 B27 TC A27 SA4 

B3 Vcc A3 SD6 B28 BALE A28 SA3 

B4 IRQ9 A4 SD5 B29 Vcc A29 SA2 

B5 -5V A5 SD4 B30 OSC A30 SA1 

B6 DRQ2 A6 SD3 B31 GND A31 SA0 

B7 -12V A7 SD2 KEY -- KEY -- 

B8 0WS- A8 SD1 D1 MEMCS16- C1 SBHE- 

B9 +12V A9 SD0 D2 IOCS16- C2 LA23 

B10 GND A10 IOCHRDY D3 IRQ10 C3 LA22 

Riser Board 5-9


ISA Bus Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin 

B11 SMEMW- A11 AEN D4 IRQ11 C4 LA21 

B12 SMEMR- A12 SA19 D5 IRQ12 C5 LA20 

B13 IOW- A13 SA18 D6 IRQ15 C6 LA19 

B14 IOR- A14 SA17 D7 IRQ14 C7 LA18 

B15 DACK3- A15 SA16 D8 DACK0- C8 LA17 

B16 DRQ3 A16 SA15 D9 DRQ0 C9 MEMR- 

B17 DACK1- A17 SA14 D10 DACK5- C10 MEMW- 

B18 DRQ1 A18 SA13 D11 DRQ5 C11 SD8 

B19 REFRESH- A19 SA12 D12 DACK6- C12 SD9 

B20 SYSCLK A20 SA11 D13 DRQ6 C13 SD10 

B21 IRQ7 A21 SA10 D14 DACK7- C14 SD11 

B22 IRQ6 A22 SA9 D15 DRQ7 C15 SD12 

B23 IRQ5 A23 SA8 D16 Vcc C16 SD13 

B24 IRQ4 A24 SA7 D17 Master- C17 SD14 

NLX Connector P1 (PCI Segment) 

The following table lists connector pin assignments for the PCI segment of riser 

board NLX connector P1. 

NLX Connector P1 Pin Assignments (PCI Segment) 

Pin Signal Type I/O Termination 

A1 -12V PWR NA NA 

A2 REQ4# PCI I RIS 

A3 +12V PWR NA NA 

A4 GNT4# PCI O RIS 

A5 3.3VDC PWR NA NA 

A6 PCIINT3# PCI I RIS 




A10 PCICLK2 PCI O MB 


A12 PCI_RST# PCI O MB




A14 PCICLK4 PCI O MB 

A15 GND PWR NA NA 





A20 AD[30] PCI I/O RIS 











A31 IRDY# PCI I/O RIS 

A32 DECSEL# PCI I/O RIS 


A34 STOP# PCI I/O RIS 

A35 PERR# PCI I/O RIS 

A36 SERR# PCI I/O RIS 


A38 C/BE[1]# PCI I/O RIS 




A42 C/BE[0]# PCI I/O RIS 




Riser Board 5-11









A51 5VDC PWR NA NA 

B1 PCSPKR_RT AUDIO O NA 

B2 +12V PWR NA NA 

B3 PCSPKR_L AUDIO O NA 

B4 +12V PWR NA NA 

B5 PCICKL0 PCI O MB 

B6 GND PWR NA NA 

B7 PCICLK1 PCI O MB 

B8 SER_IRQ MISC I/O MB 

B9 PCIINT2# PCI I RIS 

B10 3.3VDC PWR NA NA 

B11 PCICLK3 PCI O MB 


B13 GNT3# PCI O RIS 


B15 GNT2# PCI O RIS 

B16 AD[31] PCI I/O RIS 

B17 REQ0# PCI I RIS 







B24 C/BE[3]# PCI I/O RIS 



B27 AD[21] PCI I/O RIS






B31 C/BE[2]# PCI I/O RIS 

B32 FRAME# PCI I/O RIS 

B33 TRDY# PCI I/O RIS 


B35 SDONE PCI I/O RIS 

B36 LOCK# PCI I/O RIS 

B37 SBO# PCI I/O RIS 



B40 PAR PCI I/O RIS 

B41 AD[14] PCI I/o RIS 










B51 PCI_PM# PCI I/O MB 

Riser Board 5-13

NLX Connector P1 (ISA Segment) 


The following table lists connector pin assignments for the ISA segment of riser 

board NLX connector P1. 

NLX Connector P1 Pin Assignments (ISA Segment) 


A52 RSTDRV ISA O MB 

A53 IOCHK# ISA I MB 

A54 SD[6] ISA I/O MB 







A61 SMEMW# ISA O MB 

A62 SA[19] ISA I/O MB 

A63 IOW# ISA I/O MB 



A66 DACK#3 ISA O MB 


A68 DACK1# ISA O MB 

A69 DRQ1 ISAS I MB 


A71 SYSCLK ISA O MB 


A73 5VD PWR NA NA 

A74 IRQ5 ISA I MB 





A79 TC ISA O MB 

A80 BALE ISA O MB




A82 OSC ISA O MB 

A83 IOCS16# ISA I MB 

A84 MEMCS16# ISA I MB 







A91 DRQ0 ISA I MB 

A92 MEMR# ISA I/O MB 

A93 MEMW# ISA I/O MB 






A99 DACK7# ISA O MB 


A101 MASTER# ISA I MB 

B52 5VDC PWR NA NA 

B53 IRQ9 ISA O MB 

B54 DRQ2 ISA K MB 

B55 SD[3] ISA I/O MB 

B56 OWS# ISA I MB 


B58 AEN ISA O MB 

B59 IOCHRDY ISA I MB 

B60 SA[18] ISA I/O MB 

B61 SMEMR# ISA O MB 


B63 IOR# ISA I/O MB 

Riser Board 5-15




B64 DRQ3 ISA I MB 





B69 REFRESH# ISA I/O MB 



B72 IRQ7 ISA I MB 

B73 IRQ6 ISA I MB 



B76 DACK2# ISA O MB 







B83 SBHE# ISA I/O MB 

B84 LA[23] ISA I/O MB 












B96 5VDC PWR NA NA




B98 DRQ7 ISA I MB 




NLX Connector P1 (IDE, Diskette Drive, and Front Panel Segment) 

The following table lists connector pin assignments for the IDE, diskette drive, 

and front panel segment of the riser board NLX connector P1. 

NLX Connector P1 Pin Assignments (IDE, Diskette Drive, and Front 

Panel Segment) 


A102 IDEA_DD8 IDE I/O MB 

A103 IDEA_RESET# IDE O MB 









A112 IDEA_DIOW# IDE O MB 

A113 IDEA_DMARQ IDE I MB 

A114 IDEA_IORDY IDE I MB 

A115 IDEA_DMACK# IDE O MB 

A116 RESERVED RES NA NA 

A117 IDEA_DA2 IDE O MB 

A118 IDEA_CS0# IDE O MB 


A120 IDEA_DASP# IDE I RIS 

A121 IDEB_RESET# IDE O MB 

Riser Board 5-17





A122 IDEB_DD9 IDE I/O MB 








A130 IDEB_DIOW# IDE I/O MB 

A131 IDEB_DMARQ IDE I MB 

A132 IDEB_IORDY IDE I MB 


A134 IDEB_DMACK# IDE O MB 


A136 IDEB_DA0 IDE O MB 

A137 IDEB_CS0# IDE O MB 

A138 DRV2# FLOPPY GND NA 



A141 DENSEL FLOPPY O NA 

A142 FDME0# FLOPPY O NA 

A143 INDX# FLOPPY I RIS 

A144 FDME1# FLOPPY O NA 


A146 WE# FLOPPY O NA 

A147 STEP# FLOPPY O NA 

A148 WP# FLOPPY I RIS 

A149 HDSEL# FLOPPY O NA 

A150 SDA MISC I/O MB 

A151 SCL MISC O MB 

A152 FAN_TACH1 MISC I NA 

A153 FAN_TACH2 MISC I NA




A154 FAN_TACH3 MISC I NA 

A155 FAN_CTL MISC I NA 


A157 USB1/3_N MISC I/O RIS 

A158 USB1/3_P MISC I/O RIS 

A159 USB1/3_OC# MISC I RIS 

A160 USB2/4_N MISC I/O RIS 

A161 USB2/4_P MISC I/O RIS 

A162 USB2/4_OC# MISC I RIS 


A164 VBAT MISC O RIS 

A165 TAMP_DET# MISC I MB 

A166 MSG_WAIT_LED# MISC O RIS 

A167 1394_GND PWR O NA 


A169 5VSB PWR I NA 

A170 3.3VSENSE PWR O NA 


B103 IDEA_DD7 IDE I/O MB 










B113 IDEA_DIOR# IDE O MB 

B114 IDEA_CSEL IDE O MB 

B115 IDEA_INTRQ IDE I MB 


Riser Board 5-19





B117 IDEA_DA1 IDE O MB 

B118 IDEA_DA0 IDE O MB 

B119 IDEA_CS1# IDE O MB 

B120 IDEB_DD8 IDE I/O MB 











B131 IDEB_DIOR# IDE O MB 

B132 IDEB_CSEL IDE O MB 

B133 IDEB_INTRQ IDE I MB 

B134 IDEB_DA1 IDE O MB 

B135 IDEB_DA2 IDE O MB 

B136 IDEB_CS1# IDE O MB 

B137 IDEB_DASP# IDE I RIS 


B139 DRATE0 FLOPPY O NA 

B140 FDS1# FLOPPY O NA 

B141 FDS0# FLOPPY O NA 

B142 DIR# FLOPPY O NA 

B143 MSEN1 FLOPPY I NA 


B145 WRDATA# FLOPPY O NA 

B146 TRK0# FLOPPY I RIS 

B147 MSEN0 FLOPPY I NA 

B148 RDDATA# FLOPPY I RIS




B149 DSKCHG# FLOPPY I RIS 


B151 IRSL0 MISC I/O NA 



B154 IRTX MISC I/O NA 

B155 IRRX MISC I/O NA 

B156 FP_SLEEP MISC I MB 

B157 FP_RST# MISC I MB 


B159 PWRLED# MISC O RIS 

B160 PWOK PWR I NA 

B161 SOFT_ON/OFF# PWR I MB 

B162 PS_ON# PWR O NA 

B163 LAN_WAKE MISC I MB 

B164 LAN_ACTVY_LED# MISC O NA 

B165 MDM_WAKE# MISC I MB 

B166 1394_PWR PWR I NA 

B167 RESERVED RES NA NA 



B170 -5V PWR NA NA 

Riser Board 5-21

NLX Connector JP2 (Supplemental Connector Segment) 


The following table lists connector pin assignments for the supplemental 

connector segment of riser board NLX connector JP2. 

NLX Connector JP2 Pin Assignments (Supplemental Connector 

Segment) 


X1 CD_IN_LT AUDIO I Analog 1V RMS 

X2 AGND PWR NA NA 

X3 MIC_IN AUDIO I Analog 1V RMS 

X4 LINE_OUT_LT AUDIO O Analog 1V RMS 

x5 FP_SPKR_EN AUDIO I TTL 

X6 VOL_DN# AUDIO I TTL 

X7 GND PWR NA NA 

X8 SMI# SYS I Open drain 

X9 RESERVED RES NA NA 



X12 AGND PWR NA NA 

X13 MODEM_MIC AUDIO O Analog 1V RMS 

Y1 CD_IN_RT AUDIO I Analog 1V RMS 

Y2 CD_IN_GND PWR I NA 

Y3 AVCC PWR O 5-9V DC 

Y4 LINE_OUT_RT AUDIO O Analog RMS 

Y5 FP_MIC_EN AUDIO I TTL 

Y6 VOL_UP# AUDIO I L 

Y7 AC_RST# AC’97 O L 

Y8 AC_SD_IN AC’97 I L 

Y9 GROUND PWR NA NA 

Y10 AC_SD_OUT AC’97 O TTL 

Y11 AC_SYNC AC’97 O TTL 

Y12 AC_BIT_CLK AC’97 I TTL 

Y13 MODEM_SPRK AUDIO O Analog 1V RMS

Power Supply Cable Connectors 

The power supply cable connector locations on the back of the riser board are 

shown in the following figure. Pin assignments are given in the tables following 

the figure. 

Riser Board Power Supply Cable Connector Locations 

Power Supply Main Power Connector Pin Assignments 


1 +3.3V 11 +3.3V 

2 +3.3V 12 -12V 

3 COM 13 COM 

4 +5V 14 PS-ON 

5 COM 15 COM 

6 +5V 16 COM 

7 COPM 17 COM 

8 PW-OK 18 -5V 

9 5VSB 19 +5V 

10 +12V 20 +5V 

Riser Board 5-23


Power Supply Optional Power Connector Pin Assignments 

Pin Signal 

1 FanM 

2 FanC 

3 3.3V Sense 

4 1394R 

5 1394V 

6 Reserved 

Jumper Settings 

The riser board contains two 3-pin jumper blocks: LAN JP7 and fan JP3. The 

following figure shows the locations of the jumpers on the two jumper blocks. 

The jumper settings are given in the tables following the figure. 

LAN Jumper Settings 

Riser Board Jumper Locations 

The LAN jumper block JP7 enables or disables the onboard 3COM LAN. 

Enabling the LAN allows use of the onboard LAN. Disabling the onboard LAN 

permits use of an optional network board. 

LAN Jumper Block JP7 Settings 


Enable 1-2 Enables onboard LAN (factory default) 

Disable 2-3 Disables onboard LAN

Fan Jumper Settings 

The fan jumper block (JP3) permits the connection of a two-wire fan or a threewire 

fan. The jumper settings are as follows. 

Fan Jumper Block JP3 Settings 


2-Wire 1-2 Setting for 2-wire fan (factory default) 

3-Wire 2-3 Setting for 3-wire fan 

Changing Jumpers 

Use the following steps to change the jumper settings on either jumper block. 

1. Power off and unplug the system and any external options. 

! WARNING 

System power must be off before changing a jumper setting. 

2. Remove the system unit cover (see “Removing the Cover” in Section 2) and 

install the optional LAN board or the three-wire fan. 

� Install the optional LAN board and the Wake-On LAN cable (if 

installing an Intel PRO LAN 100 M2 network board). 

See Section 5 of the PowerMate 8100 Series User’s Guide and any 

documentation that may come with the network board for installation 

procedures. 

� Install the three-wire fan in the system. 

3. Locate jumper block JP7 (LAN) or JP3 (fan) on the riser board (see the 

preceding figure). 

4. Use needle nose pliers to move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 (factory 

default) to pins 2 and 3. 

5. Replace the system cover (see “Removing the Cover” in Section 2). 

6. Connect system power cables and external options. 

7. Power on the system. 

For setup procedures, see the PowerMate 8100 Series User’s Guide and any 

documentation that may come with the network board. 

Riser Board 5-25

6 

Illustrated Parts Breakdown 

� Parts and Options 

� Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) List 

� Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB)

This section contains the illustrated parts breakdown (IPB) and NEC CSD part 

numbers for the PowerMate 8100 Series Build-to-Order (BTO) systems. 

The following tables list 

� telephone numbers for ordering system parts and options 

� field-replaceable parts for the system 

� documentation and packaging for the system. 

The PowerMate 8100 Series system illustrated parts breakdown figure is at the 


Parts and Options 

The following table lists the telephone numbers to use when ordering spare parts 

and options. 

6-2 Illustrated Parts Breakdown 

Ordering Parts and Options 

Items Telephone Number 

To order spare parts (Dealers) 1-800-632-4525 

To order spare parts (Customers) In the U.S. 1-800-233-6321 

In Canada 1-800-727-2787 

To order options 1-888-863-2669 (1-888-8NEC-NOW) 

Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) List 

The following tables list the field replaceable units (FRUs), documentation, and 

packaging part numbers for the PowerMate 8100 Series of computers. 

PowerMate 8100 Series System FRU List* 

Item Description Part Number 

1 Power Cable 808-857649-101A 

2 Microsoft IntelliMouse 230-00026 

3 Keyboard, Chicony, Ergo 229-00012 

4 Diskette Drive Signal Cable, 3-connector 233-00106 

5 SCSI 4-Connector Signal Cable 233-00120 

6 IDE Hard Drive Cable, 3-connector 070836 

7 CD-ROM Signal Cable, 3-connector 233-00119 

* This data was prepared June 1998. For an up-to-date listing of spare parts, call FaxFlash at 1-888-329-0088 

(or 1-978-635-6090 outside the U.S.) and order document 42181911.



8a 

8b 

8c 

8d 

8e 

9a 

9b 

266-MHz MMX Pentium II Processor CPU Assembly 





CPU Assembly Retention Mechanism 

Heatsink Top Bar 

713-00002 

713-00003 

713-00004 

713-00007 

713-00008 

301-00038 

235-00006 

10 System Board Ejection Lever 158-052266-006 

11a 

11b 

11c 

32-MB SDRAM (4 MB x 64) DIMM 

64-MB SDRAM (8 MB x 64) DIMM (when available) 

128-MB SDRAM (16 MB x 64) DIMM (when available) 

710-00028 

710-00033 

710-00034 

12 Coin-cell Battery 158-060367-000 

13 I/O Plate (with Audio, with LAN) 780-00050 

14 System Board (JN440BX) with Onboard Audio 158-056711-000 

15 System Base Stand 210-00146 

16 Riser Card with Onboard LAN 203-00026 

17 Chassis Cover, Side/Top (mist white) 210-00148 

18 Chassis Cover, Side (mist white) 210-00154 

19 Front Panel (mist-white), includes IR PCB, Cables (complete 

assembly) 

158-052280-003 

20 Plastic Blank Panel – 5-1/4 inch (mist white) 210-00164 

21 Logo, NEC PowerMate 400-00548 

22 9-Watt Speakers w/Cables and Adapter, Altec ASC-90 160323 

23 Speaker Adapter 158-056391-000 

24 ATI XPERT@Work AGP 2X Video Board with 4 MB of Video 

Memory (Model 1331) 

25 ATI XPERT@Work AGP 2X Video Board with 8 MB of Video 

Memory 

207-00109 

207-00110 

26 ATI RagePro 2C Module 207-00116 

27 PerMedia-2A Video Board 207-00146 

28 Sound Board, Creative Labs CT4335 (AWE-32) 207-00065 

29 U.S. Robotics Fax/Data Modem, 56.6-Kbps (Akita II) 207-00068 

30 Adaptec 2940 Ultra Wide SCSI Controller Board 207-00121 

31 Front Panel Ribbon Cable 233-00117 


(or 1-978-635-6090 outside the U.S.) and order document 42181911. 

Illustrated Parts Breakdown 6-3

6-4 Illustrated Parts Breakdown 



32 Front Panel PCB 207-00126 

33 Power Supply, 200 Watt 213-00014 (HiPro) 

34 Fan Assembly 158-052266-022 

35 Rail Kit 210-00064 

36 Diskette Drive (mist white), without Bezel 219-00016 

37 Iomega 100-MB Zip Drive (IDE) 320703 

38 NEC 32X Max CD-ROM Drive (CDR1900A/PBM) 730330 

39 PCMCIA – 3.5” Drive Bay Adapter 237-00038 

40 8-GB Tape Backup Drive, Seagate (STT8000A) 221-00028 

41a 

41b 

41c 

41d 

41e 

41f 

41g 

41h 

41i 

41j 

41k 

41l 

41m 

3.2-GB IDE Hard Drive, Maxtor Ultra DMA 

3.2-GB IDE Hard Drive, Quantum ST Ultra DMA 

3.2-GB IDE Hard Drive, Quantum SE Ultra DMA 




6.4-GB IDE Hard Drive, Quantum ST Ultra DMA 




8.4-GB IDE Hard Drive, IBM DHEA Ultra DMA 

4.5-GB SCSI Hard Drive, Seagate ST 

9.1-GB SCSI Ultra-Wide Hard Drive, Western Digital 

300823-01 

300668-01 

215-00124 

215-00125 

300811-01 

215-00119 

300666-01 

300820-01 

300819-01 

215-00120 

215-00118 

215-00110 

215-00131 

42 RJ-11 Cable 158-050519-001 

43 Chassis Bottom Cover 210-00155 

---- PCMCIA ISA Controller Card (not shown) 207-00127 

---- PCMCIA Cable, 4-connector (not shown) 233-00123 

---- PCB Card Edge Guide (not shown) 451-00226 

---- CD-ROM Audio Cable (not shown) 233-00122 

---- Chassis Intrusion Switch and Housing Assembly (not shown) 158-056709-000 


(or 1-978-635-6090 outside the U.S.) and order document 42181911.

PowerMate 8100 Series System Documentation and Packaging* 

Description Part Number 

PowerMate 8100 Series User’s Guide 819-181909-000 Rev. 00 

Shipping Carton 500-00075 

PowerMate Service and Reference Manual 819-181911-000 

NEC Select Install CD-ROM – Windows 95 (Pentium II) 370-00317 

NEC Select Install CD-ROM – Windows NT 4.0 370-00318 

Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB) 

The following figure shows the illustrated parts breakdown (IPB) for 

PowerMate 8100 Series computers. Each FRU on the IPB is identified with a 

number that is a cross-reference to the FRU list. 

PowerMate 8100 Series Computer Illustrated Parts Breakdown* 


(or 1-978-635-6090 outside the U.S.) and order document 42181911. 

Illustrated Parts Breakdown 6-5

Preventive Maintenance 

� System Cleaning 

� Keyboard Cleaning 

� Mouse Cleaning 

7

This section contains general information for cleaning and checking the system, 

keyboard, and monitor. 

The system unit, keyboard, and monitor require cleaning and checking at least 

once a year, and more often if operating in a dusty environment. No other 

scheduled maintenance is required. 

System Cleaning 

7-2 Preventive Maintenance 

! WARNING 

Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. 

Voltage is present inside the system and monitor even after 

the power is off. All voltage is removed only when the power 

cord is unplugged. 

Use the following procedure for cleaning the system. 

1. Power off the system and unplug all power cables. 

2. Wipe the outside of the system, keyboard, mouse, and monitor with a soft, 

clean cloth. Remove stains with a mild detergent. Do not use solvents or 

strong, abrasive cleaners on any part of the system. 

3. Clean the monitor screen with a commercial monitor screen cleaning kit. As 

an alternative, use a glass cleaner, then wipe with a clean lint-free cloth. 

4. Local distributors and dealers may sell diskette drive head cleaning kits. 

These kits contain special diskettes and cleaning solution. Do not use the 

abrasive head cleaning kits (kits without cleaning solution). 

Insert the diskette immediately after powering on the system, before disk 

bootup. Allow the diskette drive heads to clean for about 30 seconds. 

Keyboard Cleaning 

As necessary, inspect and clean the inside of the keyboard as follows. 

1. Remove the eight screws holding the keyboard enclosure together (see the 


! CAUTION 

The keyboard and cable together are considered a wholeunit, 

field-replaceable assembly. Therefore, disassembly of 

the keyboard is necessary only when cleaning the inside.

Removing the Keyboard Enclosure 

2. Separate the two halves of the enclosure. 

3. Clean the enclosure and keys with a damp cloth. A small, soft-bristle brush 

may be used to clean between the keys. 

Do not wet or dampen the keyboard’s printed circuit board. If the board gets 

wet, thoroughly dry it before reattaching the keyboard to the system unit. 

Mouse Cleaning 

The mouse has a self-cleaning mechanism that prevents a buildup of dust or lint 

around the mouse ball and tracking mechanism under normal conditions. 

Periodically, however, the mouse ball must be cleaned. Use the following 

procedure to clean the mouse. 

1. Unplug the mouse from the system. 

2. Turn the mouse upside down and locate the ball cover (see the following 

figure). 

3. Turn the ball cover counterclockwise and remove the cover. 

Removing the Mouse Ball Cover 

4. Turn the mouse over and remove the ball. 

Preventive Maintenance 7-3

5. Clean the mouse as follows: 

� Clean the mouse ball with tap water and a mild detergent, then dry it 

with a lint-free cloth. 

� Remove any dust and lint from the mouse socket. 

6. Replace the mouse ball in its socket. 

7. Replace the ball cover and turn it clockwise until it locks in place. 

7-4 Preventive Maintenance

Troubleshooting 

� Checklist 

� Diagnostics 

8

Checklist 

This section provides information to help isolate and repair system malfunctions 

at the field level. The system has a built-in program that automatically checks its 

components when the system is powered on. If there is a problem, the system 

displays an error message. If this happens, follow any instructions on the screen. 

If screen messages do not help or an error message does not appear, refer to the 

information in this section to help determine and correct the problem. For the 

more common problems, refer to “Checklist” for assistance. If the information 

in the checklist does not help, refer to “Diagnostics ” for more detailed problem 

solving. 

If disassembly is required, see Section 3, “Disassembly and Reassembly.” 

Connector pin assignments and jumper settings are given in Section 4, “System 

Board” and in Section 5, “Riser Board.” 

Check the following list for a match to the system problem and see the possible 

cause and solution. 

System Problems 

8-2 Troubleshooting 

� No power and power lamp not lit. 

Check that all power switches are on. 

Check that the power cable is plugged into the system power socket and 

that the other end is plugged into a live, properly grounded AC power 

outlet or surge protector. 

Check the outlet or surge protector by plugging in a lamp. 

� Non-System Disk error message displays when the system is started. 

A diskette is in the diskette drive, and the diskette drive is set before the 

hard drive in boot order. Remove the diskette from drive A and restart the 

system. 

� Operating system not found error message displays when the system 

is started. 

If a CD is left in the CD-ROM drive, the system may not be able to boot. 

Try removing the CD and rebooting. 

The hard drive might need more time to spin up before the system boots. 

Change the “Hard Disk Pre-Delay” to a higher setting from the BIOS 

Setup utility “Boot” menu. 

� System does not boot and error message displayed on screen. 

Run the Setup utility (see Section 2, “System Configuration”). Check that 

the parameters are set correctly, particularly if you just installed an 

option.

� System emits continuous beeps. 

Turn the system off, wait at least five seconds, and turn the system on. If 

the beeps continue, call the NEC CSD Technical Support Center. 

� System does not maintain date, time, system configuration 

information. 

Change the battery (see “Battery Replacement” in Section 3, 

“Disassembly and Reassembly”). 

� System does not boot from hard drive. 

The system usually tries to start from the diskette drive before it starts 

from the hard drive. Remove the diskette from the diskette drive. 

Run the Setup utility (see Section 2, “System Configuration”) and set the 

initial Boot parameter to Hard Drive instead of Removable Device. 

� System does not boot immediately after hard drive spins up. 

The “Hard Disk Pre-Delay” in the BIOS Setup utility Boot menu can be 

changed to a lower setting. (If a message “operating system not found” 

appears after changing the setting, the delay is at too low. Set the hard 

disk pre-delay slightly higher.) 

� System performance appears sluggish. 

Check that the system is set for optimal operation. See the operating 

system documentation. 

Check the memory requirements of the software applications. If required, 

install additional DIMM memory (see Section 3, “Disassembly and 

Reassembly”). 

If optional DIMM memory was added, check that it is correctly installed. 

� System password forgotten. 

Diskette Drive Problems 

Clear the password and reset it. See “Clearing a Password” in Section 2, 

“System Configuration.” 

Check the following to see the possible cause and solution. 

� Diskette won’t load. 

Check that the diskette is being loaded correctly. 

Check that the system and monitor power lamps are on and the power-on 


Check that the diskette is formatted. If not, format it. See the operating 

system documentation. 

Check that the diskette size is 1.44 MB. 

Troubleshooting 8-3

Monitor Problems 


If the diskette drive busy lamp does not light when loading the diskette, 

try a different diskette. If this loads, the problem is in the software. 

� Non-System Disk or Disk Error message displayed. 

If trying to boot from the diskette drive, insert a diskette with system files 

into drive A. 

If a bootable diskette does not boot, use the Setup utility to verify that the 

initial boot parameter is set to diskette drive A and not a hard drive. 

Check the following problems to see the possible cause and solution. 

� Monitor screen is dark or the display is hard to read. 

Check that the monitor is on. 

Check that the monitor power cable is connected to the monitor and a 

power outlet, the monitor signal cable is connected to the system, and the 

brightness and contrast controls are adjusted. 

Press the space bar or move the mouse to take the system out of the 

power management mode. 

� Distorted image appears on the monitor screen. 

Adjust the monitor’s video controls. If this does not help, turn the 

monitor off for several seconds, then back on. 

� There is constant movement on the screen. 

A magnetic field is affecting the monitor. Move any devices (fan, motor, 

another monitor) that generate magnetic fields away from the monitor. 

� The screen display is fuzzy or flickering; graphics characters or 

garbage appears on the screen. 

Check that the monitor is set up correctly and that all connections have 

been made. 

Check that the video refresh rate and video driver are correct. 

Click the right mouse button anywhere on the Windows desktop and a 

menu appears. Click Properties and the Display Properties window 

appears. 

Keyboard/Mouse Problems 

Check the following problem to see the possible cause and solution. 

� Mouse or keyboard does not respond. 

The mouse and keyboard may have been connected after turning on the 

system. Turn the system off, make sure the mouse and keyboard are 

connected, and turn the system back on.

� Image appears on screen but nothing happens when using the 

mouse or keyboard. 

CD-ROM Drive Problems 

Make sure the keyboard or mouse cable is firmly connected to the rear of 

the system. 

If this does not help, turn off the system, wait five or more seconds, and 

turn on the system. 


Speaker Problems 

� The system does not see the CD-ROM drive. 

The drive designation is wrong and should be changed. The drive 

designation for the CD-ROM drive depends upon the storage device 

configuration in the system. To find out what drive designation letter is 

assigned to the CD-ROM drive, double click My Computer on the 

Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 desktop. The drive designation is below 

the CD-ROM drive icon. 

As an alternative, open Windows Explorer and scroll down the list of 

folders until you locate the CD-ROM drive icon. The drive designation is 

beside the icon. 

� The CD-ROM drive is not reading a disc. 

Check that the disc is inserted in the CD tray with the printed label side 

up. 

Check that the disc is a data disc, not a music disc. 

Try a different CD to see if the problem is limited to one CD. 

� The CD does not eject due to a power failure or software error. 

Turn off the system and use the CD-ROM emergency eject feature. Insert 

the pointed end of a paper clip into the eject hole. Press inward on the 

clip to open the door. 

� The CD-ROM drive plays music CDs but the sound is not heard. 

However, .WAV and .MIDI sounds can be heard when played. 

Check that the cable connecting from the rear of the CD-ROM drive to 

the riser board CD audio connector is in place and secure. 

Check the CD Audio volume setting. 


� No sound from the speakers. 

Check that the speaker power is on. Verify that all speaker cable 

connections are correct and secure. 

Troubleshooting 8-5

Diagnostics 


� Speaker volume is too low. 

Adjust the volume control on the speaker. If the volume is still too low, 

adjust the volume through the system software. See the Windows 

Multimedia online help. 

� Sound is only coming from one speaker. 

Balance the speaker output by adjusting the balance in the sound 

software. See the Windows Multimedia online help. 

One beep indicates that the system has completed its POST test. If intermittent 

beeping occurs, power off the system and try again. If the beeping persists, see 

the following table. The table summarizes problems that may develop during 

system operation and lists (in sequential order) suggested corrective actions. 

Problems and Solutions 

Problem Symptom Solution 

No power Power lamp on computer status 

panel does not light. 

Power supply 

malfunction 

Any of the following conditions 

could occur: 

Front panel lamps out, diskette 

and/or hard drives do not spin, 

monitor blank, interface ports not 

working, and keyboard lamp out 

and/or cannot input from keyboard. 

1. Check that the power cord is plugged 

into the power socket on the computer. 

Check that the other end of the cord is 

plugged into a live, properly grounded AC 

power outlet. 

2. Check cable connections between the 

power supply and riser board and between 

the riser board and power switch. 

3. Systematically eliminate possible 

shorted PCBs by removing cables and 

expansion boards. 

4. Check the +5 and +12 power supply 

voltages (see Section 4 “System Board”). 

Measure voltages with the system board 

installed. 

5. Replace the power switch assembly. 

6. Replace the power supply. 

7. Replace the system board. 

1. Perform steps 1 through 4 listed in this 

table under No Power. 

2. Check power supply voltages. Voltages 

should be measured with a load on them 

(system board plugged in). See Section 4 

for connector pin assignments and Section 

10 for power supply specifications. 

3. Replace the power supply.



Operating system 

does not boot 

Diskette drive does 

not work 

Hard drive 

malfunction 

Intermittent beeping at power-on. 

Computer beeps more than once 

and is unable to complete boot-up. 

“Invalid Configuration” message 

displayed. 

Computer halts during loading 

sequence. 

Lamp on drive panel does not light 

when diskette is loaded. 

Hard drive lamp does not light but 

hard drive can be accessed. 

Hard drive controller failure 

message displayed. 

1. Check system configuration (see 

Section 2). 

2. Check all jumper settings and verify that 

drives are enabled (see Section 2). 

3. Reseat DIMMs and option boards in 

their connectors. Inspect system board for 

foreign objects such as paper clips. 

4. Remove option boards and reboot. 

5. Replace system board. 

1. Press F2 to run Setup and correct the 

parameters. 

2. Replace the CMOS battery (see 

Section 3) if the date and time must be set 

each time the computer is powered on. 

1. Power the computer off. Check for 

proper jumper settings (see Section 2), then 

power-on the computer. 

2. Check condition of selected bootload 

device (diskette, disc, or hard disk) for bad 

boot track or incorrect OS files. 

3. Try booting OS from diskette or disc, or 

recopy OS files onto hard disk. 

4. Verify correct hard disk is selected. 

1. Check power and signal cable 

connections between diskette drive, riser 

board, and power supply. 

2. Check diskette drive cable. Replace as 

necessary. 

3. Check power supply. 

4. Replace diskette drive. 

5. Replace riser board. 


1. Check cable connections between lamp 

and system board. 

1. Check that the IDE channel and hard 

drives are enabled in Setup (see Section 2). 

Troubleshooting 8-7




Cannot access hard drive. 1. Check signal/power connections 

between hard disk, PCB, power supply. 

2. Check hard drive jumper settings. 

3. Check power supply. 

4. Check hard drive cable and hard drive. 

Replace as necessary. 

5. Replace system board (or hard drive 

controller PCB if the system board 

controller is not used). 

6. Replace riser board. 

Memory malfunction Total memory not recognized. 1. Reseat DIMMs. 

Modem board 

malfunction 

Keyboard or mouse 

malfunction 

2. Systematically swap DIMMs. 

3. Check to see if the DIMM configuration 

is valid (see Section 4). 

4. Replace DIMMs. 


No output from board. 1. Check interrupts (see Section 2). 

Monitor has prompt, but cannot 

input data using keyboard or 

mouse. 

2. Check DMA channels (see Section 4). 

1. Check keyboard/mouse plugged in. 

2. Check password (see Section 2). 

3. Disable password (see Section 2). 

4. Replace keyboard (or mouse). 


Monitor malfunction Unable to synchronize display. 1. Adjust the monitor’s synchronization 

controls. 

2. Check that the monitor’s resolution 

matches the video setting or the video 

driver used (see Section 2). 

3. Check that the utility is not selecting a 

refresh rate/resolution that is not supported 

by the monitor. 

4. Check that the driver used matches the 

capabilities of the built-in video controller 

and DRAM. 

Wavy display. 1. Check that the computer and monitor 

are not near motors or electric fields.



Monitor malfunction 

(cont’d) 

CD-ROM drive 

malfunction 

Blank display. 1. Press any key or move the mouse to 

ensure power management has not blanked 

the display. 

2. Check that the monitor power ON/OFF 

switch is ON. 

3. Check that the monitor cable is attached 

to the video connector at the back of the 

system. 


AC power supply and monitor. 

5. Adjust brightness and contrast controls 

on the monitor. 


monitor connector and the graphics board. 

7. Replace graphics board. 

8. Replace monitor. 

System power not on. 1. Turn system power on. 

Disc tray does not open. 1. System power not on. Turn system 

power on. 

2. System power failed. Insert the tip of a 

straightened paper clip into the emergency 

eject hole, then gently press inward until the 

tray opens. 

No sound from CDs. 1. Check that speaker power is on and 

volume is adjusted. 

2. Check audio software settings. 

3. Check the CD. 

4. Check the CD-ROM drive audio cable 

connections. 

5. Check the CD-ROM drive audio cable. 

Replace as necessary. 

6. Replace the CD-ROM drive. 

7. Replace the optional sound board. 


Troubleshooting 8-9




CD-ROM drive 

malfunction (cont’d) 

Communication 

error 

Cannot access CD-ROM drive. 1. Check that the CD-ROM driver software 

is loaded and not corrupted. 

Bad data or no data when 

communicating. 

2. Check signal and power connections 

between the CD-ROM drive, riser board, 

and power supply. 

3. Check the master/slave jumper settings 

(see Section 2). 

4. Check the IDE cable. Replace as 

necessary. 

5. Check the power supply. Replace as 

necessary. 

6. Check the system board. Replace as 

necessary. 

7. Check the riser or sound board. 

Replace as necessary 

1. Check cable connections between 

riser board and device. 

2. Check that the interface port is 

selected. 

3. Test or replace the device and 

interface cable (see the device 

documentation for troubleshooting). 


5. Replace the riser board.

9 

NEC CSD Information Services 

� Service Telephone Numbers 

� Technical Support 

� Product Information 

� FaxFlash Service

This section contains the following NEC CSD service and support information: 

� service and support telephone numbers 

� technical support 

� product information 

� FaxFlash service. 

Service Telephone Numbers 

The following table lists the telephone numbers for the NEC CSD service and 

support functions. 

NEC CSD Service and Support Telephone Numbers 

Service Telephone Numbers 

To contact NEC CSD Technical Support Center (TSC): In the U.S. and Canada, call 1 (800) 632-4525 

To order spare parts (Dealers): Call 1 (800) 632-4525 

To order spare parts (Customers): In the U.S., call 1 (800) 233-6321 

In Canada, call 1 (800) 727-2787 

To contact Customer Service about service and 

contract warranty issues: 

To log onto the NEC CSD Electronic Bulletin Board 

System (BBS) to download software drivers and the 

latest BIOS for ROM flashing: 

For information about NEC CSD products, call 

FaxFlash SM (use this automated service to have 

the latest Technical Information Bulletins sent 

to your fax machine 24 hours a day): 

9-2 NEC CSD Information Services 

Call 1 (888) 632-9128 

Call 1 (978) 635-4706 

In the U.S., 1 (888) 329-0088 

1 (888) FAX-0088 

Outside the U.S., call 1 (978) 635-6090 

To send technical questions by email: tech-support@neccsd.com 

To fax technical questions to customer support: In the U.S., fax 1 (978) 635-4100 

To access the NEC CSD website: www.nec-computers.com 

To access the NEC CSD FTP site: ftp.neccsdeast.com 

To purchase a new system or an option kit through 

NEC NOW, or to obtain sales literature or option 

information: 

Call 1 (888) 863-2669 

1 (888) 8NEC-NOW

Technical Support 

The following sections provide information for obtaining technical support from 

NEC CSD. With access to a telephone, modem, and/or fax machine, you can use 

these services to obtain information on a 24-hour basis. 

NEC CSD Website 

If you have a modem or a network board and an Internet Service account, you 

can access the NEC CSD website. The NEC CSD website contains service and 

support information, information about NEC CSD and its products, an online 

store, press releases, and reviews. 

Look in the Service and Support area for the following: 

� technical documentation, including Frequently Asked Questions, service 

and reference manuals, and warranty information 

� BIOS updates, drivers, and Setup Disk files to download 

� contact information, including telephone numbers for Technical Support 

and FaxFlash, and links to vendor websites 

� an automated email form for your technical support questions 

� a Reseller’s area (password accessible). 

To access the NEC CSD Home Page, enter the following Internet Uniform 

Resource Locator (URL) in your browser: 

www.nec-computers.com 

Email/Fax Technical Support Service 

The NEC CSD Technical Support Center offers technical support by email over 

the Internet network if you have a modem. The email address is: 

tech-support@neccsd.com 

You can also fax technical questions to the NEC CSD Technical Support Center 

if you have access to a fax machine or fax/modem. The fax number is: 

1 (978) 635-4100 

When using the email or fax support service, please include one of the following 

words in the subject field for prompt response from the appropriate technical 

person: 

� Desktop 

� Monitor 

� CD-ROM 

NEC CSD Information Services 9-3

� Printer 

� Notebook. 

Provide as much specific information in your questions as possible. Also, if 

sending a fax, please include your voice telephone number and your fax number 

with the question. You will receive a response to your questions within one 

business day. 

Technical Support Services 

NEC CSD also offers direct technical support through its Technical Support 

Center. (NEC CSD technical support is for U.S. and Canadian customers only; 

international customers should check with their sales provider.) 

Direct assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Call the NEC CSD 

Technical Support Center, toll free, at 1 (800) 632-4525 (U.S. and Canada only) 

for the following support. 

� System hardware — toll-free phone support is limited to the length of the 

standard warranty. 

For hardware support after the standard warranty, get system hardware 

support for a fee. 

� Preinstalled software — toll-free phone support for 90 days from the time 

of your first call to the NEC CSD Technical Support Center. 

After the initial 90 days, get preinstalled software support for a fee. 

Please have available your system’s name, model number, serial number, and as 

much information as possible about your system’s problem before calling. 

For callers outside the U.S. and Canada, please contact your local NEC CSD 

sales provider. 

Product Information 

In addition to the NEC CSD website, you can find product information at the 

NEC CSD FTP site and through the NEC CSD Bulletin Board Service. With 

access to a telephone, modem, and/or fax machine, you can use these services to 

obtain information on a 24-hour basis. 

NEC CSD FTP Site 

You can use the Internet to access the NEC CSD FTP (file transfer protocol) site 

to download various files (video drivers, printer drivers, BIOS updates, and 

Setup Disk files). The files are essentially the same as on the NEC CSD website 

and the NEC CSD Bulletin Board Service. 

9-4 NEC CSD Information Services

To access the NEC CSD FTP site, enter the following Internet ftp address 

through your Internet Provider service: 

ftp.neccsdeast.com 

Once in the file menu, follow the prompts to choose and download the file(s) 

you want. 

NEC CSD Bulletin Board Service 

If you have access to a modem, you can use the NEC CSD Bulletin Board 

Service (BBS) to get the latest information on hardware and software. The BBS 

allows you to download files (video drivers, printer drivers, BIOS updates, etc.) 

to a diskette for system enhancements and upgrades. 

! CAUTION 

NEC CSD recommends that you download files from the 

Bulletin Board Service to a diskette and not to your hard 

drive. 

Log onto the BBS as follows. 

1. From the Windows desktop, click Start. 

2. Point to Programs. Point to Accessories and then click HyperTerminal. 

3. Double click the Hypertrm.exe icon. The HyperTerminal program appears. 

4. Follow the instructions on the screen to set up your modem. Click the 

HyperTerminal help button for information about dialing the phone number. 

If you need to check communications settings, check that the settings match 

the following BBS parameters. 

� Baud rate: select any baud rate that matches your modem 

� Parity: none 

� Data bits: 8 

� Stop bits: 1 

� Flow control: Xon/Xoff (select Hardware if using 14.4 Kbps or higher). 

5. Following the HyperTerminal instructions, enter the BBS phone number 

(978-635-4706). Your business phone system and/or location might require 

a 9 1 or 1 prefix. 

Note: The first time that you use the BBS, you are 

requested to provide information for a new user 

questionnaire. 


6. Press Enter twice. 

7. Enter your first name, last name, and password. Press Enter after each. 

8. Follow the screen prompts until the Main Menu is displayed. 

9. At the Main Menu, select J to join a conference. Select Conference 1 for 

the desktop conference. 

10. From the Main Menu, press F and Enter for the File menu. 

11. At the File menu, select F for a list of downloadable files. Follow the 

prompts to select a file for downloading. 

! CAUTION 

Executable files automatically format your diskette when you 

download files from the BBS. Formatting destroys any data 

on the diskette. Before you download files from the BBS, 

check that you do not have information on the diskette that 

you need. 

After you complete downloading your file, log off the BBS as follows: 

12. Press Enter (to continue). 

13. Press G (command for Goodbye/Hangup). 

14. Press Enter. 

FaxFlash Service 

The NEC CSD FaxFlash service is a self-help, automated electronic information 

service for obtaining up-to-date product application notes, installation 

procedures, troubleshooting tips, data sheets, technical information bulletins, 

illustrated parts lists, part numbers, and other information about your system. 

Using a fax machine, you can obtain information from FaxFlash 24 hours a day, 

7 days a week. Simply call the FaxFlash number on your touch-tone telephone 

and order the information you want by following the voice prompts. FaxFlash 

automatically faxes the information to you. 

If you are new to FaxFlash, first order one of the following catalogs. Each 

catalog lists the available documents and their document numbers. Current 

catalogs include: 

� Catalog 1, NEC CSD Telephone Directory and Online Service 

Information 

� Catalog 3, NEC CSD Computer Product Specifications, Warranty Policy, 

UltraCare ® Guidelines, and Sales Information 

� Catalog 5, NEC ProServa and Express Serva Product Information 

9-6 NEC CSD Information Services

� Catalog 6, NEC Ready Consumer Desktop Systems 

� Catalog 7, NEC PowerMate Commercial Desktop Systems 

� Catalog 8, NEC Portable Systems (including Versa ® Notebook and 

MobilePro Handheld computers). 

Catalogs 5, 6, 7, and 8 contain technical support information, including 

Technical Information Bulletins, Illustrated Parts lists, Frequently Asked 

Questions (FAQs) lists, and other product support documents. 

Order information from FaxFlash as follows. 

1. Be sure that your fax machine or fax/modem is on. Have the document 

number ready for the document you want. 

2. At your touch-tone telephone, enter 888-329-0088 (USA and Canada) or 

978-635-6090 (international). 

3. Listen to the instructions provided by the voice prompts. 

Press 1 if you do not want an introduction to FaxFlash. Follow the 

automated instructions for ordering your document or catalog. 

Press 2 if you want an introduction to FaxFlash. Follow the automated 

instructions for ordering your catalog or document. 

4. When prompted, enter your fax number and name. 

For international use, first enter the international long distance access 

number (011), your country code, your area code or city code, then your fax 

number. 

The information you request is automatically sent to your fax machine. 

Please wait for the ordered document to arrive at your fax machine before 

calling to order more documents. If FaxFlash attempts to send the second 

order before the first order is completed, the order may be canceled. After 

three tries, FaxFlash assumes that your line is busy and terminates any 

further processing of the order. 


Specifications 

� System Board 

� Riser Board 

� Keyboard 

� Mouse 

� Speaker 

� System Unit 

� Diskette Drive 

� Hard Drives 

� Power Supply 

� Fax/Modem Board 

� Graphics Board 

� CD-ROM Drives 

� PC Adapter Unit 

� Tape Backup Unit 

� Zip Drive 

� Environmental and Safety 

10

This section contains the specifications for the various components comprising 

the PowerMate 8100 Series systems. The following table lists the specifications 

and the pages where the specifications can be found. 

10-2 Specifications 

System Specifications 

Specification Go to Page 

System board 10-3 

Riser board 10-4 

Keyboard 10-4 

Mouse 10-5 

Speakers 10-5 

System chassis 10-6 

Diskette drive 10-7 

Hard drives 10-8 

SCSI hard drives 10-17 

Power supply 10-19 

Fax/modem board 10-20 

Graphics board 10-21 

CD-ROM drives 10-23 

Sound board 10-24 

PC adapter device 10-25 

Tape backup unit 10-25 

Zip drive 10-26 

Environmental and safety 10-27

System Board Specifications 

The specifications for the system board are included in the following table. 

System Board Specifications 

Feature Specification 

System Board Intel JN440BX with AGP connector, LAN, and integrated audio 

Processor Pentium II 266 MHz MMX, 300 MHz MMX, 333 MHz MMX, 

350 MHz MMX, or 400 MHz MMX 

Cache Memory 32 KB of primary cache (16-KB data, 16-KB instruction) 

integrated in the processor 

Flash ROM 2 Mb Flash ROM 

Chip Set Intel 440BX Chipset 

512 KB of secondary cache built-in on processor 

I/O Controller FDC37C777 Super I/O controller 

System Memory 16 MB to 384 MB in three DIMM sockets on system board 

Optional DIMMs 16-MB, 32-MB, 64-MB (as available), and 128-MB (as available); 

168-pin, 64-bit (non-ECC) or 72 bit (ECC) DIMMs 

Video Accelerator ATI RAGE Pro Turbo AGP video/graphics accelerator 

170-MHz RAMDAC, and clock synthesizer integrated in a single 

chip 

Graphics Support 

1280 by 1024 pixels, up to 256 colors 

1024 by 768 pixels, up to 64K colors 

800 by 600 pixels, up to 16M colors 

640 by 480 pixels, up to 16M colors 

Text 

80 columns by 25 lines 



Video Memory Video Memory ⎯ 4 MB of 100-MHz SGRAM 

Audio Chip Crystal Semiconductor CS4235 

Battery Replaceable coin-type battery 

Specifications 10-3

Riser Board Specifications 


The specifications for the riser board are included in the following table. 

Riser Board Specifications 


Features NLX compatible 

Support for a total of four IDE devices; 40-pin connectors 

3 PCI slots 

1 shared PCI/ISA slot 

1 ISA slot 

System board slot (170-pin edge connector) 

Industry Standard Interfaces Two PCI/IDE connectors (primary and secondary) 

Diskette drive connector 

Feature connector (supplies power and signal to 

front switch panel/IR board) 

CD Audio In connector 

Modem In connector 

Intrusion connector 

LAN connector 

Wake-On LAN connector 

Fan connector 

Connections to power supply for providing DC power to system 

components. 

Keyboard Specifications 

The specifications for the keyboard are included in the following table. 

Keyboard Specifications 


Keyboard Chicony KB-8923 

Dimensions Width: 19.0 inches (48.3 cm) 

Depth: 8.4 inches (21.3 cm) 

Height: 1.6 inches (4.1 cm) 

Weight 3.5 to 4.0 lb. (1.6 to 1.8 kg)

Mouse Specifications 

The specifications for the mouse are included in the following table. 

Mouse Specifications 


Mouse Microsoft IntelliMouse 

Features 2-button with cursor movement wheel 

X & Y encoder resolution: 400 PPI opto-mechanical 

Wheel Resolution: zoom resolution 18 counts per revolution 

Operating Characteristics Vin = 115 V or 230 V as appropriate Ta = 25° 

Thermal stabilization - 1 hour minimum 

Physical Features Length: 4.53 inches 

Width: 2.6 inches 

Height: 1.52 inches 

Weight: 170 grams +/1 20 grams 

Temperature Range Operating: 5° to 35° C 

Storage: -20° to 60° C 

Speaker Specifications 

The specifications for the speaker are included in the following table. 

Speaker Specification 


Speakers Altec-Lansing 9-watt (ASC-90) 

Features Magnetically shielded 10-watt stereo speakers 

Power on/off switch and power lamp 

Volume and treble controls 

Subwoofer output jack 

15-volt AC power adapter 

Performance Frequency response, 90-20 kHz, 2 dB 

Sensitivity, 300 mV 

Output power, 4.5 watts 

Specifications 10-5

System Unit Specifications 


The specifications for the system unit are included in the following table. 

System Unit Specifications 


Dimensions Width: 8.5 inches (21.59 cm) 

Depth: 18 inches (45.72 cm) 

Height: 17 inches (43.18 cm) 

Weight Starting at 28 lb. (11.78 kg) dependent upon options 

Device Slots Three 5 1/4-inch front accessible slots 

One 3 1/2-inch front accessible slot 

Two 3 1/2-inch internal slots 

Expansion Board Slots Five slots: 

one 8-/16-bit ISA slot 

three 32-bit PCI slots 

one shared PCI/ISA slot 

Peripheral Interface (rear panel) PS/2-style keyboard connector 

PS/2-style mouse connector 

Two RS-232C serial ports 

Parallel printer port 

VGA monitor port 

Two universal serial bus ports 

Three audio connectors 

Front Panel Power button 

Power/suspend state indicator lamp 

Hard drive busy indicator lamp 

Suspend button 

Reset button

Diskette Drive Specifications 

The specifications for the diskette drive are included in the following table. 

Diskette Drive Specifications 


Diskette Drive NEC Diskette Drive FD1231H 

Recording Capacity High density mode: 

Unformatted: 

2.00/1.00 MB 

Formatted: 

1440 KB (512B 18 Sec) 

720 KB (256B 18 Sec) 

Normal density mode: 

Unformatted: 

1.00/0.50 MB 

Formatted: 

640 KB (256B 16 Sec) 

320 KB (128B 16 Sec) 

Data Transfer Rate High density mode: 

500/250 Kbit/sec 


250/125 Kbit/sec 

Disk Speed 300 rpm 

Number of Tracks 160 (80 tracks x 2 sides) 

Maximum Bit Density High density mode: 

17434/8717 BPI 


8717/4359 BPI 

Seek Time 3 ms 

Head Setting Time 15 ms 

Tracks per Inch 135 TPI 

Recording Mode MFM/FM 

Temperature Operating: 4° to 46° 

Relative Humidity 20° to 80° 

Dimensions (W x H x D) 25.4 mm x 101.6 mm x 146 mm 

Weight 430 grams (typical) 

Specifications 10-7

3.2-GB Quantum Hard Drive Specifications 

The specifications for the 3.2-GB Quantum Fireball ST hard drive are included 



3.2-GB Quantum Fireball ST Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 3.2-GB Quantum Fireball ST 

Formatted Capacity 

Nominal Rotational Speed 

Number of Disks 

Number of R/W Heads 

3228 

5,400(rpm) 

2 

4 

Data Organization Zones per surface: 15 

Tracks per surface: 7,066 

Total tracks: 28,264 

Sectors per Track Inside zone: 154 

Outside zone: 277 

Total user sectors: 6,306,048 

Bytes per sector: 512 

Number of tracks per cylinder: 4 

Recording Recording technology: Multiple Zone 

Maximum linear density: 168,650 fci 

Encoding method: 16/17 PRML 

Interleave: 1:1 

Track density: 7,777 tpi 

Maximum effective areal density: 1230 Mbits/in. sq. 

Performance Seek times 

Read-on-arrival: 10.0 ms typical; 12.0 ms max. 

Track-to-track: 2.0 ms typical 

Average write: 11.0 ms typical; 13.0 ms max. 

Full stroke: 20.0 ms typical; 24.0 ms max. 

Data transfer rate 

Disk to read buffer: 78 Mb/sec. min.; 132 Mb/sec. max; 

Read buffer to IDE bus (PIO Mode with IORDY): 

16.7 MB/sec. max. 

Read buffer to IDE bus (Ultra ATA Mode): 

33 Mb/sec. max. 

Buffer Size 128 KB 

Power +5V +/-5%; 100 mV peak-to-peak allowable ripple/noise 

12V +/-10%; 250 mV peak-to-peak allowable ripple/noise 

Temperature (non-condensing) Operating: 5° to 55° C (41° to 131°F) 

Non-operating: -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F) 

Humidity (non-condensing) Operating: 5% to 85% rh, 30°C (86°F) 

Non-operating: 5% to 95% rh, 40°C (104°F) 

Altitude Operating: -200 m to 3,000 m (-650 to 10,000 ft.) 

Non-operating: -200 m to 12,000 m (-650 to 40,000 ft.) 

Dimensions Height: 1.0 inches (25.4 mm) 

Width: 4.0 inches (101.6 mm) 

Depth: 5.75 inches (146.1 mm)

3.2-GB Maxtor Hard Drive Specifications 

The specifications for the 3.2-GB Maxtor DiamondMax hard drive are 

included in the following table. 

3.2-GB Maxtor DiamondMax Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 3.2-GB Maxtor DiamondMax 88400D3 





3200 MB 

5,200 rpm 

4 

4 



Sectors per Track Sectors per track: 195-312 

Sectors per drive: 6,329,388 


Recording Interleave: 1:1 


Maximum effective areal density: 1500 Mbits/in 2 

Performance Seek times (typical) 

Track-to-track: 1.0 ms 

Average: 9.7 ms 

Maximum: 18.0 ms 


To/from interface (Ultra DMA Mode 2): up to 33.0 Mb/sec. 

To/from interface (PIO 4 MutiWord DMA Mode 2): 


To/from media: 10.6 to 17.0 Mb/sec. 












Depth: 5.75 inches (146.1 mm) 

Weight 1.2 lbs (0.5 Kg) 

Specifications 10-9


The specifications for the 4.3-GB Quantum Fireball SE hard drive are included 



4.3-GB Quantum Fireball SE Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 4.3-GB Quantum Fireball SE 





4310 

5,400 rpm 

3 

6 





















Disk to read buffer: 70 Mb/sec. min.; 119 Mb/sec. max 



























4320 MB 

5,200 rpm 

4 

4 































Specifications 10-11


The specifications for the 6.4-GB Quantum Fireball ST hard drive are included 



6.4-GB Quantum Fireball ST Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 6.4-GB Quantum Fireball ST 





6448 

5,400 rpm 

4 

8 





















Disk to read buffer: 78 Mb/sec. min.; 132 Mb/sec. max 



























6480 MB 

5,200 rpm 

4 

4 











































8400 MB 

5,200 rpm 

4 

8 














Average: 9.7 ms max. 

Maximum: 18.0 ms max. 






Buffer Size 256 KB EDO DRAM 












Weight 1.2 lbs (0.5 Kg)


The specifications for the 8.4-GB Quantum Fireball SE hard drive are included 




Hard Drive 8.4-GB Quantum Fireball SE 





8400 MB 

5,400 rpm 

4 

8 

Sectors Sectors per drive: 12,594,960 



Maximum linear density: 208,147 fci (max) 


Track density: 8400 tpi 




Average: 9.5 ms read, 11 ms write 

Maximum: 12.0 ms read, 13 ms write 


Buffer to disc: 158 Mb/sec. 

Buffer to host: 33 MB/sec. max. 
















8.4-GB IBM Hard Drive Specifications 

The specifications for the 8.4-GB IBM DHEA-38451 hard drive are included in 



8.4-GB IBM DHEA Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 8.4-GB IBM DHEA-38451 





8400 MB 

5,400 rpm 

4 

8 

Sectors Sectors per drive: 16,514,064 



Density: 162.6 Kbpi (max.) 

Track density: 10700 tpi 


Performance Seek time: 9.5 msec (read) 

Media transfer rates: 76.2 to 127.4 MB per second 

Interface transfer rate: 33.3 MB per second (max.) 













Weight 1.2 lbs (0.5 Kg)

4.5-GB Quantum SCSI Hard Drive 


The specifications for the 4.5-GB Quantum Viking Ultra Wide SCSI-3 hard 

drive are included in the following table. 

4.5-GB Quantum Viking Ultra Wide SCSI-3 Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 4.5-GB Quantum Viking VK45W012-04-G 




Data Surfaces 


4557 MB 

7200 rpm 

4 

8 

8 

Data Organization Track density: 6432 

Areal density: 849 Mbits/in. 2 

Sectors per Track Bytes per sector: 512 



Average read/write: 8 ms typical; 9 ms max. 

Average latency: 4.17 ms 


Buffer to disk: 139 Mb/sec.(burst) 

Buffer to host: 40 Mb/sec. 



Power +5Vdc 

+12Vdc 



Humidity (non-condensing) Operating: 5% to 85% rh 

Non-operating: 5% to 95% rh 




Length: 5.75 inches (141.6 mm) 



4.5-GB Seagate SCSI Hard Drive 


The specifications for the 4.5-GB Seagate Barracuda Ultra Wide SCSI hard 

drive are included in the following table. 

4.5-GB Seagate Barracuda Ultra Wide SCSI Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 4.5-GB Seagate Barracuda ST34572W 




Data Surfaces 



4550 MB 

7200 rpm 

4 

8 

8 

Data Organization Track density: 6800 



Track-to-track: 1.0 ms typical, 1.8 ms max. 

Average read/write: 9.4 ms typical; 10.4 ms max. 



Buffer to disk: 17.5 Mb/sec.(burst) 

Buffer to host: 40 Mb/sec. 



Power +5Vdc 

+12Vdc 









Width: 4.00 inches (101.6 mm)

9.1-GB Western Digital SCSI Hard Drive 


The specifications for the 9.1-GB Western Digital Ultra Wide SCSI hard drive 

are included in the following table. 

9.1-GB Western Digital Ultra Wide SCSI Hard Drive Specifications 


Hard Drive 9.1-GB Western Digital WDE9100-0007A3 




Data Surfaces 


9105 MB 

7200 rpm 

6 

12 

12 

Data Organization Track density: 7500 tpi 



Track-to-track: 1.0 ms (read), 2.5 ms (write) 

Average seek: 8 ms (read); 9.5 ms (write) 



Media to buffer: 20 Mb/sec.(max) 

Buffer to host: 40 Mb/sec. (max) 


Interface Ultra Fast: 50 pin 

Ultra Fast Wide: 66 pin, 80 pin (SCA-2) 


Power +5Vdc 

+12Vdc 










Weight 1.3 lbs (0.59 kg) 


NLX200-Watt Power Supply Specifications 

The specifications for the NLX200-watt power supply are included in the 



NLX200 Watt Power Supply Specifications 


Power Supply NLX200-Watt Power Supply 

Operating Characteristics Vin = 115 V or 230 V as appropriate Ta = 25° 

Thermal stabilization - 1 hour minimum 

Temperature Range Operating: 10° to 50° C 

Storage: -40° to 70° C 

Fax/Modem Board Specifications 

The specifications for the fax/modem board are included in the following table. 

Fax/Modem Board Specifications 


Fax/Modem Board U.S. Robotics Sportster V.34 (Akita) 56.6 Kbps 

Data (maximum speed) x2 technology 

ITU-T V.34+ 

ITU-T V.34 

ITU-T V.32bis 

ITU-T V.32 

ITU-T V.23 

ITU-T V.22bis 

ITU-T V.22 

Bell 212A 

Bell 103 

Error Control and Data Compression ITU-T V.42 

ITU-T V.42bis 

MNP5 

Fax Modulation Schemes ITU-T V.17 

ITU-T V.29 

ITU-T V.27ter 

ITU-T V.21 

Fax Standards EIA 578 Class 1 Fax 

EIA 592 Class 2.0 Fax

ATI Xpert@Work AGP Board Specifications 

The specifications for the ATI Xpert@Work (RagePRO) 4 MB AGP board are 

included in the following table. This specification also applies to the 8-MB AGP 

board, which is a 4-MB board with a 4-MB upgrade module. 

ATI Xpert@Work (RagePRO) AGP Board Specifications 


AGP Board ATI Xpert@Work (RagePRO) AGP Board 

Controller ATI 3D RagePRO Turbo 64 bit graphics accelerator 

Bus Type AGP 2X Compliant 

Video BIOS 64 K (AGP Compliant) 

Memory 4-MB SGRAM on 4-MB AGP board 

8-MB SGRAM on 8-MB AGP board (4 MB of standard SGRAM 

plus 4-MB SGRAM module) 

Vertical Refresh 75 Hz – 200 Hz 

Maximum Dot (Pixel) Rate 170 MHz 

Connectors VGA DB-15 with DDC support for plug and play monitors 

132-pin standard AGP bus connector 

144-pin SO-DIMM connector 

AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II 2D/3D AGP 

Board Specifications 

The specifications for the AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II (3D Labs 

Permedia 2A) 2D/3D AGP board are included in the following table. 

AccelSTAR II 2D/3D AGP Board Specifications 


AGP Board AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II (3D Labs Permedia 2A) AGP 

Board 

Controller 3D Labs Permedia 2 graphics chipset 

Resolutions Up to 1600 by 1200, with 65K colors 

Bus Type AGP 2X Compliant 

Memory 8-MB SGRAM on board 

Vertical Refresh 75 Hz – 200 Hz 

Connectors VGA DB-15 with DDC support for plug and play monitors 

132-pin standard AGP bus connector 


Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive 


The specifications for the Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM drive are included in 



Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications 


32X CD-ROM Drive LG Electronics CD-ROM drive CRD-8240B 

Applicable Disc Format Mixed Mode (Audio and Data Combined) 

CD-DA, Mode 1 (basic format), Mode 2 form 1 and form 2 

Photo-CD (Multisession), CD-SA Ready 

CD-I Ready, CD-Plus 

Data Capacity (Yellow Book) 

User Data/Block 2,048 bytes/block (mode 1 and mode 2 format) 

2,340, 2,336 bytes/block (mode 2) 

2,328 bytes/block (mode 2 form 2) 

2,352 bytes/block (CD-DA) 

Rotational Speed 

1X (CLV) 

10X ~ 32X (CAV) 

Data Transfer Rate/Sustained Data 

Transfer Rate 

1X 

32X (max) 

Approximately 200 to 530 rpm 

Approximately 6486 rpm 

150 Kbytes/sec 

4920 Kbytes/sec 

Data Transfer Rate/Burst (ATAPI) 16.67 Mbytes/sec (PIO mode 4) 

16.67 Mbytes/sec (MULTI-DMA mode 2) 

Average Access Time 

1/3 Stroke 

Full Stroke 

85 ms typical (max 32X) 

85 ms typical (max 32X): including latency 


Random Access 85 ms typical (max 32X) 


Data Buffer Capacity 128 Kbytes 

Spin up, spin down, eject time 

Spin up time 

Spin down time 

Eject time 

4 sec 

4 sec 

2.0 sec typical 

Load time 1.5 sec typical. 

Voltage tolerance +5V DC +/-5%; +12V DC +/-5% 

Temperature operating: 5 ° to 45 ° 

non-operating: -20 ° to 60 ° 

Humidity operating: 10% to 80% (non-condensing) 

non-operating: 5% to 90% (non-condensing) 

Physical Dimensions H x W x L: 41.5 x 146 x 201 mm max 

Weight 0.958 Kg

NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications 

The specifications for the NEC 32X CD-ROM drive are included in the 


NEC 32X CD-ROM Drive Specifications 


32X CD-ROM Drive NEC CDR-1900A/PBM 

Data Transfer Rate 

Blocks/second 

12X - 32X 

1X 

Mode 1 and Mode 2 Form 1 

12X - 32X 

1X 

Mode 2, Mode 2 Form 2 

8X 

1X 

900 - 2460 

75 

1800 - 4920 KB/sec 

150 KB/sec 

1400 KB/sec 

175 KB/sec 

Supported Modes CD-Audio 

CD-ROM (Mode 1 and Mode 2) 

CD-XA (Mode 2, form 1 and form 2) 

CD-I (FMV) 

Video CD 

CD Extra 

Multisession Photo CD 

Single Session Photo CD 

Rotation Speed 

12X - 32X 

1X 

Access Time 

Full Stroke 

Random Stroke 

~6486 rpm; constant 

~539 to 198 rpm; variable 

Spin Up Time 4 sec. (max.) 

Spin Down Time 4 sec. (max.) 

Capacity 656 MB (Mode 1) 

748 MB (Mode 2) 

140 msec (typical, average 400 seeks) 

85 msec (typical, average 500 random access) 

User Data/Block 2048 Bytes, Mode 1 and Mode 2 Form 1 

2336 Bytes, Mode 2 

2328 Bytes, Mode 2 Form 2 

Physical Format Standards: Red, Yellow, and Orange (part 2) book. 

Weight .91 Kg 

Temperature 5°C to 45°C (Operating) 

-20°C to +60°C (Non-operating) 

Humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (Operating) 

30% to 90% relative humidity (Non-operating) 


Sound Board Specifications 

The specifications for the sound board are included in the following table. 


Sound Board Specifications 


Sound Board Model Creative Labs CT4335 AWE-32 

Digitized Sound Sound Blaster compatible 

8-bit/16-bit DMA transfer; 8-bit ADPCM decompression 

in hardware; advanced 16-bit software-based 

real time audio compression/decompression 

Input: microphone, stereo line-in, CD-Audio, FM music, 

or multiple source recording 

Automatic dynamic filtering for digital audio 

recording and playback 

Synthesized Music Creative Quadratic Modulation (CQM) 

Communications Interfaces Telephone Answering Device (TAD) Interface 

Modem Blaster Pro (MB_PRO) Interface 

Stereo Digital/Analog Mixer Output mixing of all sources 

Input mixing sources: synthesized music, 

microphone, line-in, CD-Audio 

Multiple source recording and Left/Right channels 

swappable 

32-level volume control on Digitized sound, 

synthesized music, microphone, CD-audio, 

line-in, master volume. 

4-level volume control of PC speaker 

Advanced Wave Table Synthesis EMU8000Advanced Wave Table Sound Engine 

16 channels, 128 instruments, 32-voice polyphone 

6 drum kits (GS) 

Programmable effects engine for reverb, chorus, 

vibrato, and tremolo 

Ports Microphone In Jack 

LIne In Jack 

LIne Out Jack 

Joystick/MIDI Port 

Power Output Power Amplifier 4 watts per channel; load impedance 

4 ohms (minimum)

PC Adapter Device Specifications 

The specifications for the PC adapter device are included in the following table. 

PC Adapter Device Specifications 


PCMCIA device SCM SwapBox PC Card Host SBI-D2P 

Hardware PnP 16-bit PC-AT interface card connecting to a 3.5-inch drive 

bay with twin PC Card sockets 

Card Sockets 2 

Card Configurations Two Type I/II cards or 

One Type I/II card and one Type III 

Controller ExCA-compatible PCMCIA VG469 controller; Intel register, 

step B compatible 

Software SwapFit Flash Filing system driver enabling full floppy disk or 

hard drive emulation on flash cards; compatible with all 

compression and PC-utilities software 

Single drive letter designator for all memory cards 

Graphical installation and formatting utilities 

Functionality Supports ISA Plug and Play 

Supports mixed voltage (3V) cards 

Vcc and Vpp Matrix: Micrel MTC2563 

Tape Backup Unit Specifications 

The specifications for the tape backup unit are included in the following table. 



Tape Backup Unit Seagate CTT8000 IDE Minicartridge Drive 

Capacity 4.0 GB (900 Oe 740’ Travan cartridge, 

uncompressed) 

8.0 GB (900 Oe 740’ Travan cartridge, 

compressed) 

Effective Backup Rate 30 MB/min typical native 

45 MB/min typical compressed 

Data Transfer Rate 300/450/600 KB/second Fast Sense 

Tape Speed 

Read/Write 

Search/Rewind 

33, 51, or 77 ips 

90 ips max 

Recording Method Serpentine 

Recording Format QIC-3095-MC 





Recording Code 1,7 RLL 

Error Recovery Reed Solomon ECC 

Head Configuration Wide write/narrow read 

Recording Media 900 Oe 740’ Travan TR-4 

Cartridge Size 3.2 in. x 2.4 in. x 0.4 in. (81 mm x 61 mm) 

Data Density 67,733 bpi 

Tracks 72 data tracks, one directory track 

Synchronous Transfer Rate (Burst) 5 MBytes/sec maximum 

Asynchronous Transfer Rate (Burst) 5 MBytes/sec maximum 

Voltage Tolerance +5V +/-5%; +12V +/-10% 

Temperature Operating: 5° to 45° 

Non-operating: -40° to 65° 

Humidity Operating: 20% to 80% (non-condensing) 

Non-operating: 5% to 95% (non-condensing) 

Altitude Operating: -1,000 to 15,000 feet 

Non-operating: -1,000 to 50,000 feet 

Zip Drive Specifications 

The specifications for the Zip drive are included in the following table. 

Zip Drive Specification 


Zip Drive Iomega Zip 100 ATA Drive 

Sustained Data Transfer Rate Up to 11.2 Mbits/sec 

Burst Transfer Rate Up to 26.7 Mbits/sec 

Minimum Seek 4.0 ms 

Average Seek 29.0 ms 

Maximum Seek 55.0 ms 

Average Latency 10.2 ms 

Spindle Speed 2941 rpm 

Track-to-Track Access Time 5.0 ms 

Average Head Switch Time 8.0 ms 

Head Reload Time 200.0 ms 

Average Start/Stop Time 3/2 seconds

Zip Drive Specification 


Removable Zip Cartridge Capacity 100 MB formatted 

Error Correction Reed-Solomon 

Height 1.00 in. (25.4 mm) 

Width 3.99 in. (101.4 mm) 

Depth 6.44 in. (163.6 mm) 

Weight 13.2 ounces (374.22 grams) 

Relative Humidity (Noncondensing) 10% to 80% (operating) 

Operating Temperature 10°C to 32°C 

Environmental and Safety Specifications 

The system environmental and safety specifications are included in the 




Recommended Operating 

Environment 

Temperature: 50°F to 95°F (10°C to 35°C) 

Relative Humidity: 20% to 80% 

Administrative Compliance UL 1950 - safety 

CSA C22.2 No. 950-m89 

TUV EN60950: 1988 

FCC part 15, Subpart J, Class B - emissions 

FCC part 68 

IEC 950 - safety 

VDE 0871/6.78, Class B - emissions 


Compliance 

The system meets the compliance standards listed in the following table. 


Usage Standard 

System Compliance 

Domestic FCC CFR 47 Part 15, Subpart B 

UL 1950 3 rd edition 

Canadian C-UL C22.2 No. 950-95 

ICES-003 Issue 2, Revision 1 

European CD EMC Directive 89/336 EEC 

EN55022:1993 Class B 

EN50082-1:1997 

CD LVD Directive 73/23 EEC 

EN60950 

Energy Star All modes are Energy Star Compliatn 

The system meets all requirements in the European Waste Regulation Ordinance 

for packaging and scrap.

Release Notes 

� General Notes 

� SCSI Drive Limitations 

� PIIX4 Limitations 

� Windows 95 Issues 

A

The PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes provide up-to-date information on 

installing the applications that come with the computer. These notes also 

provide additional valuable information about the computer that was not 

included in the printed user’s guide or online NEC Help Center. 

General Notes 

The following notes describe general system behaviors and recommended 

operating procedures not documented in other PowerMate 8100 Series 

documentation. 

Installing Applications and Online Documentation 

The system comes with the operating system preloaded. All other applications 

and the online documentation are installed from the NEC Select Install CD. 

Follow the guidelines in this section when installing applications, the NEC Help 

Center online documentation, and the Healthy Environment online brochure. 

Choosing the Correct Installation Method 

Most applications and the online documentation are installed from the NEC 

Select Install CD using the Selective Application Restore program. However, 

the NEC SNMP Agent and NEC WebTelligent are both installed using a 

Setup.exe program launched from a subdirectory on the NEC Select Install CD. 

Installing Applications in the Correct Order 

Microsoft ® Internet Explorer ® must installed first and alone in separate Select 

Install session. LANDesk ® Client Manager must also be installed in a separate 

Select Install session, and before certain other applications. The NEC SNMP 

Agent and LANDesk Client Manager should not both be installed on the same 

computer. Use these guidelines when installing applications and online 

documentation. 

� Install Microsoft Internet Explorer first and alone, before installing any 

other application on the NEC Select Install CD. 

� Install LANDesk Client Manager alone and before installing NEC 

Security, Cheyenne Backup utility, NEC Configuration Change 

Notification, the NEC Auto Backup utility, or NEC WebTelligent. 

Note: LANDesk Client Manager should be installed 

before any of the applications or utilities that function in 

conjunction with it. Install NEC Security, Cheyenne Backup 

utility, the NEC Configuration Change Notification, NEC Auto 

Backup utility, and the NEC WebTelligent software after 

installing LANDesk Client Manager. (The NEC Auto Backup 

utility is not available on SCSI-based systems.) 

A-2 NEC PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes

� Do not install both the NEC SNMP Agent and LANDesk Client Manager 

on the same computer. The two applications are incompatible, and neither 

can be removed using the uninstall utility. To remove them, a full restore 

must be performed after which all applications must be reinstalled. 

! CAUTION 

Do not install both the NEC SNMP Agent and LANDesk 

Client Manager on the same computer. 

� The NEC SNMP Agent and the NEC WebTelligent software are each 

installed using a Setup.exe program launched from a subdirectory on the 

NEC Select Install CD. These applications can be installed without regard 

to the order in which other applications are installed. 

� Applications other than LANDesk Client Manager, Internet Explorer, the 

NEC SNMP Agent, or the NEC WebTelligent software can be installed 

during the same Select Install session or, if installed in different sessions, 

in any order once Internet Explorer and LANDesk Client Manager are 

installed. (The NEC Auto Backup utility is not available on SCSI-based 

systems.) 

� Install the NEC Help Center after installing Microsoft Internet Explorer 

4.01 on the system. The Help Center cannot run without Microsoft 

Internet Explorer 4.01 and it cannot be installed from the NEC Select 

Install CD unless Internet Explorer 4.01 has already been installed. 

Note: Install the NEC Help Center after installing 

Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 on the system. The Help 

Center cannot run without IE 4.01 and it cannot be installed 

unless IE 4.01 has already been installed. 

See Section 2, “System Configuration,” for procedures on installing applications 

from the NEC Select Install CD. 

Uninstalling the NEC SNMP Agent or LANDesk Client Manager 

LANDesk Client Manager and the NEC SNMP Agent are not fully compatible 

when both are installed on the same computer. 

Note: Do not install both LANDesk Client Manager and 

the NEC SNMP Agent on the same computer. 

NEC PowerMate 8100 Series Release Notes A-3

If both applications have been installed, LANDesk Client Manger does not 

function correctly, and cannot display ASIC-related tabs for temperature, fan, 

voltage, and chassis intrusion status. In addition, each time the computer is 

restarted, a Service Control Manger window displays an error message and 

prompts the user to press Enter. 

! CAUTION 

If LANDesk Client Manager and the NEC SNMP Agent have 

both been installed, it is not possible to remove either 

application using the uninstall utility. A full operating system 

restore must be performed using the NEC Select Install CD. 

If LANDesk Client Manager and the NEC SNMP Agent have both been 

installed, it is not possible to remove either application using the uninstall 

utility. If you attempt to remove one of the applications, a full operating system 

restore must be performed using the NEC Select Install CD. After the full 

restore, all appropriate applications should be reinstalled from the CD using the 

Selective Application Restore program or a setup.exe program. Do not reinstall 

both LANDesk Client Manager and the NEC SNMP Agent. 

Correcting Video Corruption 

Video corruption may occur in some PowerMate 8100 Series systems. See the 

following sections for guidelines on correcting the display in systems running 

the Windows 95 and Windows NT operating systems. 

Correcting Video Corruption in a Windows 95 System 

In a system running the Windows 95 operating system, an icon dragged across 

the desktop may corrupt the desktop colors in its wake. 

To correct the desktop color display, take one of the following steps. 

� Close the Internet Explorer Channel Bar by clicking in its close box. 

� Disable the Internet Explorer Channel Bar from the Display Properties 

window: 

⎯ Right click anywhere on the desktop and click Properties. 

⎯ Click the Web tab in the Display Properties window. 

⎯ Uncheck the box next to Internet Explorer Channel Bar. Click OK. 

� Change the background wallpaper from any of the following: NEC3D, 

Metal Links, Forrest, Stitches, or Clouds. 

⎯ Right click anywhere on the desktop and click Properties. 


⎯ Click the Background tab in the Display Properties window. 

⎯ Highlight a different wallpaper pattern. Click OK. 

Correcting Video Corruption in a Windows NT System 

In a system running the Windows NT operating system, the desktop color 

palette may shift after the Display Properties window has been opened. 

To correct the desktop color palette, change the background wallpaper from 

NEC3D or Winnt256 to None, Wallpapr, or Winnt. 

1. Right click anywhere on the desktop and click Properties in the popup 

menu. 

2. Click the Background tab in the Display Properties window. 

3. Highlight a different wallpaper pattern. Click OK. 

Setting Boot Order in BIOS 

To use the CD-ROM drive as a boot device, the BIOS must list it as the first 

device. Otherwise, the CD-ROM drive should be last in boot order. 

The system does not boot from a Zip ® drive if it is listed as the first boot device. 

Using 16-MB DIMMs 

In systems with memory consisting of one 16-MB DIMM, performance may be 

slower than expected. NEC recommends installing two 16-MB DIMMs in a 

system with 16-MB DIMMs, for a minimum of 32 MB of system memory. 

Configuring the System for the NEC SNMP Agent 

TCP/IP must be enabled before the NEC SNMP Agent can be used. See 

“Changing Network Settings” below for instructions on enabling TCP/IP. (The 

NEC SNMP Agent is installed from the NEC Select Install CD. See 

Section 2, “System Configuration,” for procedures on installing the SNMP 

Agent.) 

Configuring the System for NEC WebTelligent 

TCP/IP must be enabled before NEC WebTelligent can be used. See 

“Changing Network Settings” below for instructions on enabling TCP/IP. (NEC 

WebTelligent is installed from the NEC Select Install CD. See 

Section 2, “System Configuration,” for procedures on installing WebTelligent.) 


Configuring the System for Microsoft Internet Explorer 

TCP/IP must be enabled before Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 can be used. 

See “Changing Network Settings” below for instructions on enabling TCP/IP. 

(Internet Explorer is installed from the NEC Select Install CD. See 

Section 2, “System Configuration,” for procedures on installing Internet 

Explorer.) 

Changing Network Settings 

All systems are configured with the NetBEUI and NWLink protocols enabled. 

However, before connecting a system to the network you might need to: 

� enable a different network protocol 

� disable unneeded protocols for enhanced system performance 

� add or change network, domain, and gateway information. 

The following paragraphs describe how to disable the NetBEUI and NWLink 

protocols, enable TCP/IP, and provide network, domain, and gateway 

information. (If a different protocol is enabled, the menu choices may differ 

from those described below.) 

1. From the Windows desktop, click Start on the taskbar, point to Settings, 

and click Control Panel. 

2. Double click the Network icon in the Control Panel window. 

3. Click the Protocols tab. In the Protocols display, the following protocols 

are loaded: 

NetBEUI Protocol 

NWLink IPXSPX-Compatible Transport 

NWLink NetBIOS 

4. Highlight NWLink IPXSPX-Compatible Transport and click Remove. A 

warning window appears asking for confirmation to continue. 

5. Click Yes. The NWLink IPXSPX-Compatible Transport and NWLink 

NetBIOS lines disappear from the Protocols display. 

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to remove the NetBEUI Protocol. 

7. Click Add. The Select Network Protocol window appears. 

8. Highlight TCP/IP and click OK. The TCP/IP Setup window appears. If there 

is a DHCP server on the network, click Yes; otherwise click No. 

9. Change the path in the window to C:\I386. Click Continue. The Network 

window appears. If Yes was clicked in step 8, skip to step 16. If No was 

clicked in step 8, the Windows Setup window appears. 

10. Click Close. The Microsoft TCP/IP Properties Box appears. 

11. Fill in the IP Address, the Subnet Mask, and the Default Gateway in the 

“Specify an IP address” area. 


12. Click the DNS tab and enter the host and domain name in the DNS display. 

13. Click the Identification tab and change the Computer Name if appropriate. 

14. Click the WINS tab and enter the WINS address if appropriate. 

15. Click the Routing tab and enable IP forwarding if appropriate. 

16. Click OK. When prompted to restart the system, click Yes. 

SCSI Drive Limitations 

The following procedures and operating limitations apply to systems whose only 

hard drive is a SCSI device. 

Booting from a CD 

In systems with only a SCSI hard drive, it is not possible to boot from an IDE 

CD-ROM drive. 

Using the NEC Select Install CD with a SCSI Drive 

If a situation arises in which a full operating system restore must be performed 

using the NEC Select Install CD, first boot the system from the bootable 

diskette. (This might be necessary, for example, if the system does not boot 

from the hard drive.) The bootable diskette comes with all systems that have a 

SCSI hard drive. After the system boots, proceed with the NEC Select Install 

procedure. 

PIIX4 Limitations 

The following operating limitations apply to PIIX4 (PCI ISA IDE Xcelerator). 

Reconfiguring Ultra DMA Support 

The PCI IDE interface on the PowerMate 8100 Series system supports the latest 

ATA ULTRA DMA/33 interface. In order to do so, the PIIX4 component that 

was recently released from Intel Corporation was incorporated in the system. 

However, standard versions of Windows ® 95 were released prior to the release 

of PIIX4; these versions do not recognize the PIIX4 as capable of supporting 

ULTRA DMA/33. 

Several information files (.INF files) need to be added to standard versions of 

Windows 95 so the operating system can incorporate PIIX4 features. NEC CSD 

already includes these .INF files in the preinstalled software that comes with 

your system. NEC CSD recommends that customers use the version of 

Windows 95 that is included with their system. 

Note: NEC CSD recommends that customers use the 

version of Windows 95 that is included with their system 

because this version is already configured for Ultra DMA/33. 


When users install their own version of Windows 95, ULTRA DMA/33 does 

not function without the addition of these files. These .INF files can be added to 

a new install of Windows 95 by using the NEC Select Install CD. This results in 

full ULTRA DMA/33 support. 

Determining IDE Device Compatibility 

The new PIIX4 component contains a small change in the IDE interface. This 

change to lower voltage levels on one signal has no effect on most of the IDE 

hard drives on the market. A small number of older drives fail to function with 

this new setting. If there is a concern about using an older drive with the 

PowerMate 8100 Series system, contact NEC CSD Technical Support Services 

to help determine if there will be a problem. 

Windows 95 Issues 

The following notes describe conditions and procedures specific to systems 

running the Microsoft ® Windows ® 95 operating system. 

Controlling CD Audio 

CD audio volume is not controlled by the Windows 95 taskbar Volume Control. 

To control CD audio volume, access the CD player program. Move the volume 

slider bars up or down to increase or decrease CD audio volume. 

Using Cheyenne Backup 

The following notes describe conditions and procedures specific to systems 

running the Cheyenne Backup. 

Backing Up Large Drives 

When Cheyenne Backup is set to automatically back up a drive to a network 

drive, and the system drive being backed up is greater than 2.l GB, multiple 

instances of the Copy program may be launched, according to how many drive 

letters are assigned to the hard drive. The first instances end with an indication 

that no data was transferred. The last instance completes the backup 

successfully. 

Using Cheyenne Backup with LANDesk Client Manager 

Cheyenne Backup may occasionally report that a backup was incomplete. 

Cheyenne Backup does not back up files that are open, so it may report this 

condition if the backup was run while files are open, or because LANDesk ® 

Client Manager itself is running. 

When this happens, buttons are displayed in the report window providing 

options for backing up files or utilities that are open. See the documentation on 

Cheyenne Backup for more information on these options. 


Clicking the Product Catalog Button 

When a computer running the Windows 95 operating system is first booted, a 

Welcome screen appears. If the Product Catalog button is clicked, the user is 

prompted to insert the Windows 95 CD. Click Cancel to clear the message. 


Glossary 

A 

access time 

The time period between the supply of an access signal and the output or 

acceptance of the data by the addressed system. Examples are the access times for 

DRAMs, SRAMs, hard drives, and CD-ROM drives. Hard drive access time is the 

time it takes for a computer to get data from the drive. A hard drive with an 11 ms 

access time is fast. A CD-ROM drive with a 280-ms access time is fast. 

ACPI 

Advanced Configuration and Power Interface. A power management specification 

developed by Intel, Microsoft, and Toshiba. When installed on the system, ACPI 

enables the operating system to control the amount of power given to each device 

attached to the computer. With ACPI, the operating system can turn off peripheral 

devices (such as CD-ROM drives) when they are not in use. As another example, 

ACPI enables manufacturers to produce computers that automatically power up as 

soon as you touch the keyboard. 

adapter 

An expansion board or component on the system board that communicates with 

peripherals (such as the display monitor or network devices). 

address 

A hexadecimal number that represents a location in storage or memory. Also used 

to identify communication ports. To communicate with a storage device. 

AGP 

Accelerated Graphics Port. A high-speed, high-performance video standard 

supported by a dedicated connector on the system board. The connector allows the 

connection of an AGP board to the system board’s AGP bus. AGP boards feature 

64- or 128-bit graphics acceleration with an integrated digital video engine and 

accelerated 3-D graphics, texture mapping, and shading functions. Fast refresh 

rates, high resolution, and color depth allow for incredible graphics suitable for 

multimedia and graphic intensive applications. 

algorithm 

Any set of instructions to be followed in order. 

anti-aliasing 

Making jagged edges look smoother by filling in the jags with an intermediate 

color. Usually used in reference to the edges of shapes, especially letters, on a 

computer screen. 

Glossary 1

2 Glossary 

API 

Application Programming Interface. An API is a series of functions that programs 

can use to make the operating system do routine or repetitive tasks. Using Windows 

APIs, for example, a program can open windows, files, and message boxes (as well 

as perform more complicated tasks) by passing a single instruction. Windows has 

several classes of APIs that deal with telephony, messaging, and other issues. 

APM 

Advanced Power Management. An API developed by Intel and Microsoft that 

allows developers to include power management in the BIOS. APM defines a layer 

between the hardware and the operating system that effectively shields the 

programmer from hardware details. 

application programs 

Software designed to perform specific functions or a group of functions, like 

solving business or mathematical problems. Examples of applications include word 

processing, communications, or database management. 

architecture 

A general term for the design and construction of computer systems, particularly 

hardware, but also operating systems and networks. The circuitry within a chip is 

called its architecture; for example, Intel architecture can refer to a computer based 

on the Intel Celsior or other Pentium II chips. 

archive 

Copying one or more files to a different location for long-term data storage, 

especially for backup and security purposes. Files can then be added to or deleted 

from the archive. Also refers to the location where data is stored. 

ASIC 

Application Specific Integrated Circuit. A chip designed for use on a particular 

circuit board, or for a very narrow range of use. The digital signal processor chip on 

a modem is an ASIC. 

asynchronous 

Refers to operations that do not require the clocks of communicating devices to be 

coordinated. Instead, the devices send signals to each other indicating readiness to 

receive or send. Compare synchronous. 

asynchronous cache 

The slowest, most inexpensive type of secondary SRAM cache, running at speeds 

of 15 to 20 ns. 

ATA 

AT Attachment. A standard for connecting hard drives or other devices to an AT 

bus; synonymous with IDE. 

AT bus 

The AT bus system with support chips (DMA, PIC, etc) and a 16-bit bus slot. The 

AT bus is strictly defined by ISA.

audio 

Relating to or capable of producing sound. Multimedia computers make extensive 

use of audio. 

AVI 

A digital movie format created by Microsoft. AVI is short for “audio/video 

interleave,” a method of including a digital movie and its accompanying sound in 

the same file. Files in the AVI format have the .AVI extension. 

B 

bad sector 

Part of a hard drive or diskette drive storage medium that doesn’t hold data. 

Formatting generally detects and marks these areas so they won’t be used. Certain 

utility programs do, too, and it is a good idea to run this type of utility occasionally 

to prevent data loss if the condition of the drive changes. 

bandwidth 

A measure of how much information something can carry. Specifically, data path 

times frequency. For example, the ISA bus has a data path of 16 bits (it can send 16 

bits at a time) and typically operates at 8.33 MHz, so it has a bandwidth of 

133.28 megabits per second (Mbps). 

base RAM 

Area of system memory between 0 and 640 kilobytes available to the user for 

operating system and application programs. 

batch file 

A file that contains a series of DOS commands. Batch files have the extension .bat. 

If you execute a batch file, DOS attempts to carry out all the commands in the file, 

in order. 

baud 

A unit of measure for modem speed. Literally, the number of voltage transitions per 

second. Phone line limitations limit the actual baud rate of modems to 2400 baud, 

although the data transmission rate (bps) may be higher because of data 

compression. 

BBS 

Short for Bulletin Board Service. Software that serves as a communication and 

information source for computers that communicate by modem. 

BIOS 

Basic Input/Output System. A program or set of programs permanently stored in 

ROM chips installed on the system board. The BIOS contains functions that control 

the real-time clock, keyboard, disk drives, video display, and other peripheral 

devices. For example, the BIOS Setup utility program is contained in the BIOS, and 

when you change the drive type, you change the BIOS. 

Glossary 3

4 Glossary 

bit 

Binary digit. The smallest unit of computer data. A single digital piece of 

information, generally represented by the numeral 0 or 1. Usually the transition 

between the states of +5V and -5V within a computer, the charge of a transistor in 

an integrated circuit, or the change in polarity of a magnetic region on a disk. See 

byte. Data compression schemes can enable the transmission of more than one bit 

per voltage transition. 

bit block transfer 

Moving part of a screen image as a single block rather than moving a pixel at a 

time. Bit block transfers are much faster than moving the same pixels individually, 

and it is common in accelerated video cards. 

bitBLT 

Bit Block Transfer. 

bitmap 

Any occurrence where a single location in memory and a single pixel correspond. 

Usually applies to screen or printer output. .BMP files are bitmapped graphics files. 

bits per second 

(bps) A unit of transmission. Also called baud rate. 

block 

A contiguous section of bits considered as a whole, especially in memory. On a 

disk, the data in one sector; in modem data transfer, the bits between checksums. 

board 

Printed circuit board. Board onto which computer components are soldered and thin 

wires are printed to connect the components. 

boot 

To start up a computer. The computer is generally booted in one of three ways: by 

turning on the power switch (cold boot), by pressing the reset switch, or by 

simultaneously pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys (warm boot). Booting the 

system after it has already been powered up and booted is referred to as rebooting. 

Also the process of booting itself. Boot is from “bootstrap,” a reference to a 

computer’s ability to set itself up, or pull itself up by its own ‘bootstraps.’ See cold 

boot and warm boot. 

bootable device 

Any type of hardware that carries the information (software) required by the 

computer to start properly. This device must also have the capacity to be 

recognized by the computer in the first stages of the boot process. 

boot block 

The part of a disk that contains the software (such as the operating system loader) 

that enables the computer to start.

oot sector 

The part of the boot block that contains the operating system loader, a program that 

starts by itself and loads the operating system. 

bps 

Bits per second. The number of bits of data that can be transmitted in one second. 

Because data compression schemes enable more than one bit per voltage transition, 

bps is equivalent to baud only if no compression is used. 

buffer 

A place, especially in RAM, for the temporary storage of data for the purpose of 

speeding up an operation such as printing or drive access. Data from a buffer is 

available more quickly than data from where the buffer got it. Typically buffers get 

data before it is needed so it is ready quickly when needed. Similar to cache. 

burst mode 

When a device seizes control of the bus, sends data, then relinquishes control of the 

bus. Any time a device sends data without interruption instead of taking turns with 

other devices. 

bus 

A parallel electrical pathway on the system board, connecting and shared by the 

parts of a computer system (especially the CPU, its support circuitry, memory, and 

expansion cards), used for transmitting data or electrical power from one device to 

another. Typically the lines in a bus are dedicated to specific functions, such as 

control lines, address lines, and data lines. Different bus architectures have different 

numbers and arrangements of these lines, and different names (for example, ISA, 

PCI). The most useful way of distinguishing bus architectures is by the number of 

simultaneous data bits they can carry. The ISA is a 16-bit bus, while PCI is a 32-bit 

bus. 

bus master 

The ability of an expansion card to control the bus without needing intervention 

from the CPU. 

byte 

Group of eight contiguous bits. Frequently written as an eight-digit binary number 

or a two-digit hexadecimal number. One letter of the alphabet in ASCII code takes 

one byte. 

C 

cache 

A special block of fast memory used for temporary storage of frequently used data 

for quick retrieval. A memory cache, sometimes called a cache store or RAM 

cache, is a portion of memory made of high-speed static RAM (SRAM) instead of 

the slower and cheaper dynamic RAM (DRAM) used for system memory. Memory 

caching is effective because most programs access the same data or instructions 

over and over. By keeping as much of this information as possible in SRAM, the 

computer avoids accessing the slower DRAM See “write-back” and “writethrough.” 

Glossary 5

6 Glossary 

chassis 

The metal frame to which the electronic components of the computer (such as the 

system board, power supply, and drive bays) are attached The chassis goes inside 

the system unit cover. 

checksum 

A number, calculated from a block of data, used to verify the integrity of that data. 

For example, a modem could send a block of data and include the number of 1’s 

that occur in the block. The receiving modem could count the number of 1’s it 

receives and compare its own number with the transmitted number. If the numbers 

are the same, the transmission was probably OK. 

clock 

Electronic timer (oscillator) used to synchronize computer operations. The 

oscillator generates the timing pulses that coordinate and enable the flow of data 

within a digital device. Also a circuit powered by battery that keeps track of the 

date and time for human and various system requirements. 

clock speed 

The frequency at which a clock oscillates. In microcomputers, measured in MHz. 

The faster the clock, the faster the computer can compute. 

CMOS 

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor. A chip on the system board that 

contains nonvolatile memory. CMOS is backed up by an internal lithium battery 

that preserves clock/calendar data and system configuration parameters stored in 

CMOS. 

codec 

Coder-decoder. Used primarily with Internet phone and video conferencing 

products, this software compresses digitized data and decompresses it at the other 

end, allowing for faster data transfer and less delays 

cold boot 

Process of starting up the computer by turning on the power. If power is already on, 

the process means to turn off the computer and turn it on again. A cold boot 

reinitializes all devices. 

compression 

Any scheme for recording data with fewer bits. For example, stating how many 

times something occurs can be shorter than stating each occurrence. It is shorter to 

say “print a million white pixels” than to say “print white pixel number one, print 

white pixel number two . . .” 

D 

default 

The system’s factory setting for a specific device feature or system function. A 

setting that a computer uses if it has not been modified by a user.

DIMM 

Dual Inline Memory Module. Circuit board with pins connecting to different 

memory chips on both sides of the board, which allows for wider and faster data 

transfer (128-bit). See SIMMs. 

DMA 

Direct Memory Access. A method for transferring data, usually between memory 

and a disk drive, without going through the CPU. 

DMI 

Desktop Management Interface. A standard for PCs that allows manipulation of PC 

components over a network from a centralized location. 

DRAM 

Dynamic Random Access Memory. Memory used to store data in most computers. 

DRAM is temporary and must be continually refreshed. It is only active when the 

computer is turned on. 

driver 

A software program that enables peripheral devices (for example, printer, monitor, 

mouse, CD-ROM drive) to work with computers. 

DVD 

Digital versatile disc or digital video disc. A type of CD-ROM that holds a 

minimum of 4.7 GB, enough for a full-length movie. The DVD specification 

supports disks with capacities of from 4.7 GB to 17 GB and access rates of 600 

Kbps to 1.3 Mbps. One of the features of DVD drives is that they are backwardcompatible 

with CD-ROM disks. This means that DVD players can play old CD- 

ROMs, CD-I disks, and video CDs, as well as new DVD-ROMs. Newer DVD 

players can also read CD-R disks. DVD uses MPEG-2 to compress video data. See 

MPEG. 

E 

ECC memory 

Error Checking and Correcting memory. Advanced type of memory that can find 

and correct certain types of single-bit memory errors, providing greater data 

integrity. Advanced ECC can correct some double-bit errors. 

ECP 

Extended Capabilities Port. A parallel-port standard for PCs that supports 

bidirectional communication between the PC and attached devices (such as a 

printer). ECP is about 10 times faster than the older Centronics standard. Another 

modern parallel port for PCs that offers similar performance is the EPP (Enhanced 

Parallel Port). 

EDO memory 

Extended Data Out memory. A faster type of asynchronous computer memory that 

holds its last-requested data in a cache after releasing it. EDO memory is designed 

for use with the Intel Pentium and Pentium II processors. 

Glossary 7

8 Glossary 

EIDE 

Extended Integrated Drive Electronics. The EIDE specification is an enhanced 

version of IDE that allows for faster transfer rates and supports larger hard drive 

sizes 

enhanced VGA 

A video interface that offers more colors or higher resolution than VGA. 

EPP 

Enhanced Parallel Port, a parallel port standard for PCs that supports bidirectional 

communication between the PC and attached device (such as a printer). EPP is 

about 10 times faster than the older Centronics standard. Another modern parallel 

port for PCs that offers similar performance is the ECP (Extended Capabilities 

Port). 

extended RAM 

The area of RAM above the first megabyte of memory in the system available for 

enhancing system performance. 

F 

FAT 

File Allocation Table. A table near the beginning of a drive that identifies the 

location of everything on the drive. 

flash ROM 

Method in which a computer’s BIOS ROM can be upgraded without replacing the 

ROM BIOS chip. 

FTP 

File Transfer Protocol. A method of transferring files between two computers on a 

TCP/IP network (such as the Internet). “Anonymous FTP” (the most common 

usage on the Internet) allows a user to download files without having an account at 

the remote computer. 

function key 

The set of keys on the keyboard (usually F1 through F12) that let you get help and 

error message information or quickly select frequently used commands. 

G 

graphics accelerator 

A term referring to a higher end video controller that handles high-speed graphics 

and usually contains several megabytes of onboard video memory. 

GUI 

Graphical User Interface. Method of presenting information on a computer screen 

utilizing icons, pull-down menus, and a mouse.

H 

hertz 

(Hz) A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second. 

hexadecimal 

A number system that uses 16 as the base. (Place value indicates powers of 16.) It 

uses the digits 0-9 and A-F. Used around computers because a byte (eight binary 

digits) easily converts to a two digit hexadecimal number. Hexadecimal numbers 

are often indicated with the letter H, a dollar sign, or a subscripted 16 after the 

number. Compare binary, decimal. 

host adapter 

An expansion board that serves as a controller for SCSI devices. 

hot key 

Combination of two or three keys (such as Ctrl-Alt-D) that you press 

simultaneously for a particular function. 

hot plugging 

The ability to add and remove devices to a computer while the computer is running 

and have the operating system automatically recognize the change. The Universal 

Serial Bus (see USB ) external bus standard supports hot plugging. This is also a 

feature of PCMCIA. Hot plugging is also called hot swapping. 

I 

IDE 

Intelligent Drive Electronics. A hard drive type that has controller electronics built 

into the drive and delivers high throughput. 

interface 

A connection that enables two devices to communicate. 

interrupt 

A signal from part of a system, such as an I/O device, asking to use the CPU. 

Interrupts are hierarchical, which prevents interrupts from interrupting each other. 

(Whichever interrupt has higher priority makes the other interrupt wait.) When the 

CPU receives an interrupt signal, it saves what it is doing, processes the routine 

associated with the interrupt, then returns to what it was doing. 

I/O address 

Input-Output address. How the CPU sees an I/O port. It puts data into this address 

or reads the data in it. The device at the other end of the I/O port gets the data from 

that address or puts the data there, respectively. 

Glossary 9

10 Glossary 

IRQ 

Interrupt Request. A signal that, when received by the CPU, makes it stop what it is 

going to do something else. An interrupt is a way in which a particular device in a 

computer communicates with the CPU. PCs have 16 IRQ lines that can be assigned 

to different devices (for example, printers, scanners, modems). No two devices can 

have the same IRQ address. See interrupt. 

ISA 

Industry Standard Architecture. The bus architecture used in the IBM PC/XT and 

PC/AT. The AT version of the bus is called the AT bus and has become an industry 

standard. The apparent successor is the PCI local bus architecture found in most of 

today’s computers. Most modern computers include both an AT bus for slower 

devices and a PCI local bus for devices that need better bus performance. In 1993, 

Intel and Microsoft introduced a new version of the ISA specification called Plug 

and Play ISA. Plug and Play ISA enables the operating system to configure 

expansion boards automatically so that users do not need to fiddle with DIP 

switches and jumpers. See plug and play. 

isochronous 

A form of data transmission in which individual characters are only separated by a 

whole number of bit-length intervals. 

K 

kilobyte 

(KB) 1024 bytes. 

L 

L2 cache 

Refers to “level 2” or “secondary” cache. A type of cache that resides on the 

motherboard except when referring to a Pentium II machine, where it resides on the 

CPU module. 

LAN 

Local Area Network. 

LPT1 

Name assigned to the parallel port by the Windows operating system. A second 

parallel device is assigned LPT2 (if there is another parallel port). Also called the 

printer port. 

M 

master 

Part of a two-sided communication that initiates commands (to a “slave” that 

carries out the commands). 

megabyte 

(MB) 1,048,576 bytes.

memory 

Electronic storage area in a computer that retains information and programs. A 

computer has two types of memory: read-only memory (ROM) and random access 

memory (RAM). 

microprocessor 

A semiconductor central processing unit that is the principal component of a 

microcomputer. Usually contained on a single chip that includes an arithmetic logic 

unit, control logic, and control-memory unit. 

MIDI 

Musical Instrument Digital Interface. An interface for connecting suitably equipped 

musical instruments to suitably equipped computers. 

MIF 

Management Information File. A file stored on a PC that holds system data such as 

a model ID and serial number that can be manipulated over a network from a 

centralized location. 

MMX 

A processor architecture that enhances multimedia and communications. This 

technology processes multiple data elements in parallel, speeding up such things as 

image processing, motion video, speech synthesis, telephony, and 3-D graphics. 

modem 

MOdulator-DEModulator. A device that links computers over a telephone line. 

MPC 

Multimedia Personal Computer, a software and hardware standard developed by a 

consortium of computer firms led by Microsoft. There are three MPC standards, 

called MPC, MPC2, and MPC3, respectively. Each specifies a minimum hardware 

configuration for running multimedia software. 

MPEG 

Motion Pictures Expert Group. Audio/Video technology that allows for better than 

VHS quality video and almost CD quality audio by using advanced compression 

techniques. MPEG files allow for more realistic motion with a smaller file size than 

earlier formats, making it a popular format for digital full-length movies. Files in 

the MPEG format have an .MPG extension. 

N 

nonvolatile memory 

Storage media that retains its data when system power is turned off. Nonvolatile 

memory is a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) chip that is 

backed up by an internal battery. The backup battery preserves the clock/calendar 

data and system configuration parameters stored in CMOS. See volatile memory. 

O 

operating system 

Set of programs that manage the overall operation of the computer. 

Glossary 11

12 Glossary 

overwrite 

Storing information at a location where information is already stored, thus 

destroying the original information. 

P 

page 

A type of message transmission in which a message is sent or received via modem 

to a paging device from a computer (with paging communications software) or 

telephone. 

parallel interface 

Interface that communicates eight bits at a time. 

parallel printer 

A printer with a parallel interface. 

parameter 

A characteristic of a device or system determined by a command or setting whose 

purpose is to define or limit the characteristic. 

password 

A string of characters that the user must enter before the system allows access or 

system privileges. 

PCI 

Peripheral Component Interface/Interconnect. A self-configuring personal 

computer local bus designed by Intel. Most modern PCs include a PCI bus in 

addition to a more general ISA expansion bus. PCI is a 32-bit bus, but supports a 

64-bit extension for new processors, such as the Pentium II. It can run at clock 

speeds of 33 or 66 MHz. At 32 bits and 33 MHz, it yields a throughput rate of 

133 megabits per second. 64-bit implementations running at 66 MHz provide 

524 Mbps. See ISA. 

peripheral 

Input or output device not under direct computer control. A printer is a peripheral 

device. 

pixels 

Picture elements. Tiny dots that make up a screen image. A pixel is the smallest 

spot on the screen that a computer can address. 

plug and play 

Refers to the ability of a computer system to automatically configure expansion 

boards and other devices. This enables a user to plug in a device and use it, without 

worrying about setting DIP switches, jumpers, and other configuration elements.

port 

Any connection by which data can enter or leave a computer or peripheral. You 

Cables are plug into ports. Provides the means for an interface between the 

microprocessor and external devices. A cable connector is usually plugged into the 

port to attach the device to the computer. 

processor 

In a computer, a functional unit that interprets and executes instructions. 

prompt 

A special symbol indicating the beginning of an input line. Also a message that 

appears on the screen indicating that the user must take a certain action. 

R 

RAM 

Random Access Memory. A storage device into which data is entered and from 

which data is retrieved in a nonsequential manner. On the system board, RAM is 

semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written to by the microprocessor 

or other hardware devices. In RAM, data can be directly and randomly read or 

written (with any choice for the address). It’s the storage location for data that 

needs to be immediately available for every application in use on your computer. 

read 

To extract data from a storage device such as a diskette. 

ROM 

Read-Only Memory. Memory in which stored data cannot be modified by the user 

except under special conditions. 

reset 

The process of returning a device to zero or to an initial or arbitrarily selected 

condition. 

resolution 

The degree of screen image clarity. Video display resolution is determined by the 

number of pixels on the screen. Resolution is usually specified in pixels by scan 

lines, for example, 640 by 480. See pixels. 

RS-232C 

Standard interface for serial devices. 

S 

SEC 

Single-Edge Contact. The SEC cartridge containing the Pentium II processor. See 

Slot 1. 

serial interface 

An interface that communicates information one bit at a time. 

Glossary 13

14 Glossary 

serial printer 

A printer with a serial interface. 

SGRAM 

Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory. A type of DRAM used 

increasingly on video adapters and graphics accelerators. Like SDRAM, SGRAM 

can synchronize itself with the CPU bus clock at speeds of up to 100 MHz. In 

addition, SGRAM uses several other techniques, such as masked writes and block 

writes, to increase bandwidth for graphics-intensive functions. Unlike VRAM and 

WRAM, SGRAM is single-ported (it can only be accessed by one device at a time). 

However, it can open two memory pages at once, which simulates the dual-port 

nature of other video RAM technologies (access by two different devices 

simultaneously). See VRAM and WRAM. 

SIMM 

Single Inline Memory Module. A small circuit board holding a group of memory 

chips. Typically, SIMMs hold up to nine RAM chips. On PCs, the ninth chip is for 

parity error checking. Unlike memory chips, SIMMs are measured in bytes rather 

than bits. In today’s SIMMs, each chip holds 2 MB, so a single SIMM holds 16 

MB. SIMMs are easier to install than individual memory chips. The bus from a 

SIMM to the actual memory chips is 32 bits wide. A newer technology, called dual 

in-line memory module (DIMM), provides a 64-bit bus. To take advantage of the 

64-bit bus on Pentium II processors, use either DIMMs or pairs of SIMMs. See 

DIMMs. 

Slot 1 

The form factor for Intel Pentium II processors. The Slot 1 package replaces the 

Socket 7 and Socket 8 form factors used by previous Pentium processors. Slot 1 is a 

242-pin daughter card slot that accepts a microprocessor packaged as a Single Edge 

Contact (SEC) cartridge. A system board can have one or two Slot 1s. See SEC. 

SMART 

Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. A hard drive feature that 

works in conjunction with system software (for example, LANDesk Client 

Manager, NEC Auto Backup) for identifying a potential problem on the hard drive 

and automatically backing up system files to a user-specified device, such as a tape 

or Zip drive. 

sound card 

An expansion card designed for sound input and output. Sound cards can record 

and play back digital audio. Most also have a MIDI synthesizer, which means they 

can play MIDI files; some also have MIDI inputs and outputs. 

super video graphics array (SVGA) 

A color bit-mapped graphics display standard that provides a resolution of 1024x 

768 with up to 256 colors displayed simultaneously. 

synchronous 

Refers to protocols that require the clocks of the communicating machines to be 

coordinated.

system board 

The main printed circuit board inside the system unit into which other boards and 

major chip components, such as the system microprocessor, are connected. 

T 

tpi 

Tracks per inch. 

track 

Any of many concentric circular regions on a disk for storing data. Tracks are 

divided into sectors. One measure of storage density of a disk is tpi. 

U 

Ultra DMA 

A protocol developed by Quantum Corporation and Intel that supports burst mode 

data transfer rates of 33.3 MBps. This is twice as fast as the previous disk drive 

standard for PCs, and is necessary to take advantage of new, faster Ultra ATA disk 

drives. The official name for the protocol is Ultra DMA/33. 

USB 

Universal Serial Bus. An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 

12 Mbps (12 million bits per second). A single USB port can be used to connect up 

to 127 peripheral devices, such as mice, modems, and keyboards. USB also 

supports Plug-and-Play installation and hot plugging. It is expected to eventually 

replace serial and parallel ports. 

V 

VESA 

Video Electronics Standards Association. The source of a SuperVGA standard used 

on many video boards. 

virus 

Software that copies itself onto hard drives and diskettes without user intervention, 

usually when a diskette is placed into the drive of a computer. Viruses usually 

trigger a harmless or destructive occurrence on the system, activated by some preset 

condition. Viruses are frequently written with antisocial intent. 

VGA 

Video Graphics Array. Graphics technology that supports up to 256 K colors and a 

graphics resolution of 640 by 480 pixels. 

volatile memory 

Storage media that loses its data when system power is turned off. Standard 

memory and memory added to the system are volatile memory. See nonvolatile 

memory. 

Glossary 15

16 Glossary 

VRAM 

Video RAM. VRAM is special-purpose memory used by video adapters. Unlike 

conventional RAM, VRAM can be accessed by two different devices 

simultaneously. This enables a video adapter to access the VRAM for screen 

updates at the same time that the CPU provides new data. VRAM yields better 

graphics performance but is more expensive than normal RAM. A special type of 

VRAM, called Windows RAM (WRAM), yields even better performance than 

conventional VRAM. See SGRAM and WRAM. 

W 

warm boot 

Process of resetting the computer without turning off the power through keyboard 

input (pressing Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys simultaneously) or the reset button. The 

system returns to an initial or arbitrarily selected condition. 

WRAM 

Windows RAM. A type of RAM that supports two ports. This enables a video 

adapter to fetch the contents of memory for display at the same time that new bytes 

are being pumped into memory. This results in much faster display than is possible 

with conventional single-port RAM. WRAM is similar to VRAM, but achieves 

even faster performance at less cost because it supports addressing of large blocks 

(windows) of video memory. See VRAM and SGRAM. 

write 

To record or store information to a storage device. 

write-back 

Also called copy back. A cache strategy where write operations to data stored in the 

internal microprocessor L1 cache aren’t copied to system memory until absolutely 

necessary. In contrast, a write-through cache performs all write operations in 

parallel; data is written to system memory and the L1 cache simultaneously. Writeback 

caching yields somewhat better performance than write-through caching 

because it reduces the number of write operations to main memory. See cache and 

write-through. 

write-through 

Also write-thru. Write-through characterizes a cache strategy where data is always 

written into system memory when data is written by the CPU. See cache and write 

back. 

X 

X2 technology 

A technology developed by U.S. Robotics (now 3Com) for delivering data rates up 

to 56 Kbps over plain old telephone service (POTS). It was long believed that the 

maximum data transmission rate over copper telephone wires was 33.6 Kbps, but 

X2 achieves higher rates by taking advantage of the fact that most phone switching 

stations are connected by high-speed digital lines. X2 bypasses the normal digitalto-analog 

conversion and sends the digital data over the telephone wires directly to 

a modem where it is decoded.

Index 

A 

Accelerated graphics port, 4-18 

Addresses 

parallel port, 2-3 

AGP board, 1-13 

removal, 3-16 

Applications 

installing, A-2 

uninstalling, A-3 

ASIC hardware monitor, 4-14 

Audio, 4-19 

B 

Back features, 1-6 

Battery 

removal, 3-27 

BBS, 9-5 

BIOS 

advanced menu, 2-13 

boot menu, 2-22 

DMI event logging, 2-18 

exit menu, 2-24 

floppy drive options, 2-17 

IDE device configuration parameters, 2-16 

keyboard configuration, 2-20 

main menu, 2-12 

maintenance menu, 2-24 

peripheral configuration parameters, 2-14 

power menu, 2-21 

recovery jumper, 4-7 

resource configuration, 2-19 

security menu, 2-20 

setting boot order, A-5 

setup, 2-10 

starting, 2-11 

system, 4-13 

update utility, 2-26 

using, 2-12 

video configuration, 2-19 

Blank panel 

removal, 3-13 

Boot menu, 2-22 

Bulletin board service, 9-5 

C 

Cable connectors 

riser board, 5-2 

system board, 4-2 

CD audio in cable connector, 5-3 

CD-ROM drive jumpers 

Lucky Goldstar CD-ROM, 2-9 

NEC CD-ROM, 2-8 

CD-ROM drives 

cabling, 1-13 

features, 1-13 

Lucky Goldstar 32X specifications, 10-22 

NEC 32X specifications, 10-23 

Changing password, 4-6 

Chassis floor 

removal, 3-7 

replacing, 3-8 

Chassis intrusion 

detection cable connector, 5-4 

notification, 1-9, 2-30 

Cheyenne Backup, 2-49 

system specific issues, A-8 

Chipset 

440BX, 4-11 

Clearing password, 4-6 

CMOS battery 

removal, 3-27 

Components, 1-10 


CD-ROM drive, 1-13 

fax/modem board, 1-13 

hard drive, 1-11 

IntelliMouse, 1-12 

keyboard, 1-12 

local area network, 1-14 

mouse, 1-12 

pc adapter device, 1-15 

power supply, 1-12 


SCSI adapter board, 1-14 

sound board, 1-14 

speakers, 1-13 


tape backup unit, 1-15 

Zip drive, 1-15 

Configuration jumper 

location, 4-4 

settings, 2-5 

Configurations, 1-2, 1-3 

Connectors 


system board, 4-2, 4-3 

Index-1

D 

Device removal 

3 1/2-inch diskette drive, 3-20 

3 1/2-inch hard disk, 3-19 

5 1/4-inch, 3-18 

DIMM module 

removal, 3-15 

sockets, 4-8 

supported DIMMs, 4-9 

upgrade paths, 4-9 

Disassembly 

3 1/2-inch diskette drive, 3-20 

3 1/2-inch hard drive, 3-19 

5 1/4-inch device, 3-18 


blank panel, 3-13 

chassis floor, 3-7 

CMOS battery, 3-27 

DIMM module, 3-15 

expansion board, 3-11 

expansion board guide, 3-14 

front panel, 3-12 

general rules, 3-2 

metal slot cover, 3-13 


processor subsystem, 3-17 


sequence, 3-2 

stand, 3-9 

static electricity caution, 3-3 

switch board/IR panel assembly, 3-14 


system board plastic rail, 3-25 

system unit cover, 3-4 

Diskette drive, 1-11 

connector, 5-7 

removal, 3-20 

specifications, 10-7 

DMA settings, 4-28 

Documentation, online 

Healthy Environment, 2-46 

NEC Help Center, 2-46 

E 

Email/fax technical support, 9-3 

Environmental and safety 


Exit menu, 2-24 

Expansion board 

guide removal, 3-14 

removal, 3-11 

Index-2 

External cable connectors, 4-2 

F 

Fan cable connector, 5-5 

Fax/modem board, 1-13 

jumpers, 2-9 


FaxFlash, 9-2, 9-6 

Features 

back, 1-6 

front, 1-4 

inside, 1-8 

security, 1-9 

Field replaceable units list, 6-2 

Front features, 1-4 

Front panel 

IrDA cable connector, 5-4 

removal, 3-12 

FRU list, 6-2 

FTP site, 9-4 

G 

Graphics 

AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II 

board, 4-18 

AccelSTAR II board specifications, 10-21 

AGP, 4-18 


ATI XPERT@Work AGP board, 4-17 

ATI Xpert@Work AGP board 


capabilities, 4-17 

controller, 4-18 

display modes, 4-18 

MPEG, 4-18 

H 

Hard drive, 1-11 

removal, 3-19 

Hard drive jumpers 

IBM hard drive, 2-7 

Maxtor hard drive, 2-6 

Quantum hard drive, 2-6 

Quantum SCSI hard drive, 2-7 

Seagate SCSI hard drive, 2-7 

Western Digital SCSI hard drive, 2-8 

Hard drives 

Ultra DMA reconfiguring, A-7 

Hardware monitor, 4-14 

Healthy Environment online brochure 

installing, 2-46

I 

I/O addresses, 4-26 

IBM hard drive 

8.4-GB hard drive specifications, 10-16 

IDE cable connectors, 5-6 

IDE connector pin assignments, 5-6 

Illustrated parts breakdown, 6-5 

parts lists, 6-2 

Infrared interface, 4-17 

Inside features, 1-8 

IntelliMouse, 1-12 


Interface 

infrared, 4-17 

parallel, 4-15 

serial, 4-16 

USB, 4-17 

Interrupts 

parallel port, 2-3 

serial port, 2-4 

system IRQs, 2-2 

IPB, 6-5 

IRQs, 2-2 

ISA 

bus, 4-14 


J 

Jumpers 

BIOS recovery, 4-7 

clearing password, 4-6 

configuration select, 2-5 

fax/modem, 2-9 

IBM IDE hard drive, 2-7 

Lucky Goldstar CD-ROM, 2-9 

Maxtor IDE hard drive, 2-6 

NEC CD-ROM, 2-8 

Quantum IDE hard drive, 2-6 

Quantum SCSI hard drive, 2-7 

riser board fan, 2-5, 5-24 

riser board LAN, 2-5, 5-24 

Seagate SCSI hard drive, 2-7 

settings, 2-4 

system configuration, 4-4 


Western Digital SCSI hard drive, 2-8 


K 

Keyboard, 1-12 

cleaning, 7-2 

configuration, 2-20 


L 

LAN 

cable connector, 5-5 

riser board jumpers, 5-24 

LANDesk Client Manager, 2-27 

chassis intrusion notification, 2-30 

monitoring capabilities, 2-30 

NEC Auto Backup, 2-31 

PC health indicator, 2-28 

using DMI, 2-29 

Lucky Goldstar CD-ROM drive jumpers, 2-9 

M 

Maintenance 

keyboard cleaning, 7-2 

mouse cleaning, 7-3 

system cleaning, 7-2 

Maintenance menu, 2-24 

Maxtor hard drive 





Memory 

checking, 4-10 

Memory map, 4-25 

Menus 

advanced, 2-13 

boot, 2-22 

exit, 2-24 

main, 2-12 

maintenance, 2-24 

power, 2-21 

security, 2-20 

Metal slot cover 

removal, 3-13 

Microsoft Internet Explorer 

configuring system for, A-6 

Modem in cable connector, 5-3 

Mouse, 1-12 

cleaning, 7-3 

Mouse specifications, 10-5 

MPEG, 4-18 

N 


NEC CD-ROM drive jumpers, 2-8 

NEC Configuration Change Notification, 2-58 

NEC CSD service and support 

bulletin board service (BBS), 9-5 

email/fax technical support, 9-3 

FaxFlash, 9-6 

FTP site, 9-4 

Index-3

product information, 9-4 

technical support services, 9-4 

telephone numbers, 9-2 

website, 9-3 

NEC CSD service and support 

information, 9-2 

NEC driver CD, 2-47 


installing, 2-46 

uninstalling, 2-46 

NEC security, 1-9, 2-49 

NEC Select Install CD, 2-31 

selecting restore options, 2-42 

NEC SNMP Agent, 2-50 


configuring system for, A-5 

description, 2-53 


Network, 1-14 

changing settings, A-6 

NLX 

design, 4-14 

IDE connector, 5-17 

ISA connector, 5-14 

PCI connector, 5-10 

supplemental connector, 5-22 

O 

Online documentation 

Healthy Environment, 2-46 


P 

Parallel interface, 4-15 

Parallel port 

addresses, 2-3, 4-16 

interrupts, 2-3 

Parts 

FRU list, 6-2 

IPB, 6-5 

ordering, 6-2 

Password 

clearing password jumper, 4-6 

security, 1-9 

PC adapter device, 1-15 


PC Health Indicator, 2-28 

Inventory, 2-29 

PCI 

connectors, 5-8 

local bus, 4-15 

Index-4 

PCI/IDE ports, 4-15 

Pin assignments, 4-20 

DIMM socket, 4-24 

diskette drive, 5-7 

ISA connectors, 5-9 


line in, 4-23 

line out, 4-23 

microphone in, 4-23 

mouse, 4-21 

NLX connector, 5-10, 5-14, 5-17, 5-22 

parallel interface, 4-20 

PCI connectors, 5-8 

power supply connectors, 5-23 

serial interface, 4-21 

USB, 4-22 

VGA interface connector, 4-22 

Plug and Play, 4-14 

Power setup menu, 2-21 

Power supply, 1-12 


removal, 3-21 


Preventive maintenance 

keyboard cleaning, 7-2 

mouse cleaning, 7-3 

system cleaning, 7-2 

Problems 

diagnosing and solving, 8-6 

Processor 

changing speed, 4-4 

socket, 4-8 

subsystem removal, 3-17 

Product information, 9-4 

Q 

Quantum IDE hard drive 





Quantum SCSI hard drive 


R 

Reassembly 

cover replacement, 3-6 

Release notes, A-2 

Resolutions, 4-18 

video, 2-25 

Restoring 

files, 2-31

Riser board, 1-11 

cable connections, 5-2 

CD audio in connector, 5-3 

changing jumper settings, 5-25 

chassis intrusion detection connector, 5-4 

diskette drive connector, 5-7 

fan connector, 5-5 

fan jumper settings, 2-5, 5-25 

front panel/IrDA connector, 5-4 

IDE and diskette drive pin assignments, 5-6 

IDE connectors, 5-6 

ISA connector, 5-9 

jumpers, 5-24 

LAN connector, 5-5 

LAN jumper settings, 2-5, 5-24 

modem in connector, 5-3 

NLX connector, 5-10, 5-14, 5-17 

PCI connectors, 5-8 

PCI/ISA connector pin assignments, 5-8 

power supply connectors, 5-23 

removal, 3-26 


subsystem connector pin assignments, 5-3 

Wake-On LAN connector, 5-4 

S 

S.E.C. cartridge, 4-8 


SCSI hard drives 

drive limitations, A-7 

jumper settings, 2-7, 2-8 

Quantum 4.5 GB, 10-17 

Seagate 4.5 GB, 10-18 

Western Digital 9.1 GB, 10-19 

SCSISelect utility, 2-26 

Seagate SCSI hard drive 


Security 

features, 1-9 

locking tab, 1-9 

menu, 2-20 

Select Install CD, 2-31 

Serial port 

addresses, 2-4 

interface, 4-16 

interrupts, 2-4 

Setup 

BIOS, 2-10 

SNMP Agent, 2-50 

Sound board specifications, 10-24 

Sound system, 4-19 

Speakers 

set, 1-13 



3.2-GB Maxtor hard drive, 10-9 

3.2-GB Quantum hard drive, 10-8 



4.5-GB Quantum SCSI hard drive, 10-17 

4.5-GB Seagate SCSI hard drive, 10-18 



8.4-GB IBM hard drive, 10-16 



9.1-GB Western Digital SCSI 


AccelGRAPHICS AccelSTAR II graphics 

board, 10-21 

ATI Xpert@Work AGP board, 10-21 


environmental and safety, 10-27 



Lucky Goldstar 32X CD-ROM, 10-22 

mouse, 10-5 

NEC 32X CD-ROM, 10-23 

PC adapter device, 10-25 




speaker, 10-5 

system, 10-2 


system unit, 10-6 



Stand 

removing, 3-9 


Switch board/IR panel assembly 

removal, 3-14 

System 

cleaning, 7-2 

System board, 1-10 

440BX chipset, 4-11 

82558 LAN controller, 4-12 

AGP, 4-18 

alert on LAN component, 4-12 

BIOS, 4-13 

BIOS recovery jumper, 4-7 

clearing password jumper, 4-6 

components, 4-10 

configuration jumper, 4-4 

Crystal CS4235 audio, 4-12 

Index-5

DIMM module sockets, 4-8 

DMA settings, 4-28 

external cable connector locations, 4-2 

Flash ROM, 4-13 

graphics boards, 4-17 

hardware monitor, 4-14 

Heceta LM79, 4-12 

I/O addresses, 4-26 

infrared interface, 4-17 

integrated audio, 4-19 

internal cable connectors, 4-3 

ISA bus, 4-14 

memory, 4-13 

memory map, 4-25 

parallel interface, 4-15 

parallel port addresses, 4-16 

PCI local bus, 4-15 

PCI/IDE ports, 4-15 

pin assignments, 4-20 

plug and play, 4-14 

processor, 4-12 

processor socket, 4-8 

removal, 3-22 


resources, 4-25 

secondary cache, 4-12 


super I/O controller, 4-12 

USB interface, 4-17 

video support, 4-18 

System board plastic rail 

removal, 3-25 

System components, 1-10 







local area network, 1-14 

mouse, 1-12 

pc adapter device, 1-15 





speakers, 1-13 




System configuration 

interrupt requests, 2-2 

jumper settings, 2-4 

Index-6 

utilities, 2-26 

video modes, 2-25 

System configurations, 1-2, 1-3 

System features 

back, 1-6 

front, 1-4 

inside, 1-8 

security, 1-9 

System interrupts, 2-2 

System memory 

checking, 4-10 

System overview, 1-2 

configurations, 1-2, 1-3 

front features, 1-4 

System specifications, 10-2 

System unit cover 

disassembly, 3-4 


System unit specifications, 10-6 

T 

Tape backup unit 

features, 1-15 

jumpers, 2-10 


Technical support services, 9-4 

Telephone numbers 

service and support, 9-2 

Troubleshooting, 8-2 



keyboard/mouse, 8-4 

monitor, 8-4 

problem checklist, 8-2 

problem diagnostics, 8-6 

speakers, 8-5 

U 

Upgrade sockets 

DIMM, 4-8 

processor, 4-8 

USB 

interface, 4-17 

pin assignments, 4-22 

Utilities 

BIOS update, 2-26 

Cheyenne Backup, 2-49 

LANDesk Client Manager, 2-27 


NEC Configuration Change 

Notification, 2-58 

NEC driver CD, 2-47 

NEC Security, 2-49

NEC SNMP Agent, 2-50 

NEC WebTelligent, 2-53 

SCSISelect, 2-26 

Select Install CD, 2-31 

V 

Video board 

resolution, 2-25 

Video corruption 

correcting, A-4 

Video modes, 2-25 

Video support, 4-18 

W 

Wake-On LAN cable connector, 5-4 

Website, 9-3 

WebTelligent, 2-53 


Western Digital SCSI hard drive 


Windows 95 issues, A-8 

controlling CD audio, A-8 

Product Catalog button, A-9 

using Cheyenne Backup, A-8 

Windows network security, 1-9 

Z 


jumpers, 2-9 


Index-7

(For United States Use Only) 

Federal Communications Commission 

Radio Frequency Interference Statement 

WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible 

for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital 

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable 

protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses 

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the 

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. 

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this 

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be 

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the 

interference by one or more of the following measures. 

� Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 

� Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 

� Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one to which the receiver 

is connected. 

Use shielded and properly grounded I/O cables and power cable to ensure compliance of this unit to 

the specified limits of the rules. 

(For Canadian Use Only) 

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing 

Equipment Regulations. 

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B repecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel 

brouilleur du Canada.

Battery Replacement 

A lithium battery in some computers maintains system configuration information. In the event that 

the battery fails to maintain system configuration information, NEC recommends that you replace 

the battery. For battery replacement information, see “CMOS Battery Removal” in Section 3 of this 

manual or call your NEC CSD dealer or the NEC CSD Technical Support Center. 

WARNING: There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only 

with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries 

according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 

ATTENTION: Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a replacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer 

uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre 

au rébut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 

Battery Disposal 

Do not place used batteries in your regular trash. 

The nickel-cadmium or nickel metal-hydride batteries must be collected, recycled, or disposed of in 

an environmentally-approved manner. 

The incineration, landfilling, or mixing of batteries with the municipal solid waste stream is 

prohibited by law in most areas. 

Return batteries to a federal or state approved battery recycler. This may be where your purchased 

the battery or a local seller of automotive batteries. 

Contact your local waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally 

sound collection, recycling, and disposal of the batteries.

caution - Support

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?